<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/"><title type="text">Jacobin</title><id>https://jacobin.com</id><updated>2026-10-23T23:21:02.749736Z</updated><link href="https://jacobin.com"/><logo>https://jacobin.com/static/img/logo/logo-type.png</logo><subtitle type="text">Jacobin is a leading voice of the American left, offering socialist perspectives on politics, economics, and culture.</subtitle><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/yemen-war-houthis-saudi-arabia</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/yemen-war-houthis-saudi-arabia"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/jpeg" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/695863891964.jpg"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/695863891964.jpg" medium="image" type="image/jpeg"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/695863891964.jpg"/><title type="text">There’s No End in Sight to Yemen’s Destructive War</title><updated>2026-10-23T19:43:21.966635Z</updated><author><name>Helen Lackner</name></author><category label="International Relations" term="International Relations"/><category label="War and Imperialism" term="War and Imperialism"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><div><p>Yet again, the world is failing to give Yemen the attention it deserves. Well over a month into the renewal of the war between Ansar Allah, known as the Huthis, and the internationally recognized government (IRG), there have already been thousands of military and civilian casualties on both sides.</p><p>Fierce fighting is going on in different parts of the country, and more than 250,000 people have been displaced, most of whom are moving from one active front line to areas that might be swept up in the conflict within hours.</p><p>The humanitarian situation is disastrous, with famine threatening in some parts of the country. One of Yemen’s largest cities, Taiz, is under siege by the Huthis, with hardly any medical supplies, food, or water arriving for the population, now swollen by the 120,000 or so people displaced within the governorate.</p><p>All of this deserves to be the focus of international concern. The return of full-scale fighting in Yemen was expected. Throughout the country, few favored continuation of the “no war, no peace” situation that had prevailed since the 2022 temporary truce.</p><p>Despite this, the main events to have grabbed the headlines are the few Huthi drones and missiles that successfully attacked airports and some oil facilities in Riyadh and other locations in Saudi Arabia. Admittedly, these attacks have killed close to twenty people and wounded more than three hundred, and they are an important political development for the kingdom.</p><p>They also demonstrate that the regional conflict has expanded way beyond both Gaza and Iran, thanks to Donald Trump’s recklessness in going to war in support of Benjamin Netanyahu’s projects. While there is a clear link between the Iran war and what is going on in Yemen and Saudi Arabia, the issues in the two centers of conflict are distinct, and each could exist without the other. But are lives lost in Riyadh worth more than those in Taiz or Sana’a?</p></div><section id="sec-1"><header><h2>Back to War</h2></header><div><p>Since July 2026, the war in Yemen has resumed at a fiercer and more destructive tempo than its original outbreak in 2015. Fighting on the ground is costing hundreds of lives, mainly among the Huthi troops whose leaders are sending waves of young and inexperienced fighters, many of whom were forcibly recruited, to the front lines in pursuit of their offensive.</p><p>Fighting continues in the northern areas of Marib and Sa’ada bordering Saudi Arabia. In early September, Ansar Allah took control of the southern part of the Yemeni coast, including both the Bab al-Mandab Strait and Mokha. It achieved this rapid victory thanks to three main factors: its own command efficiency, continued division and lack of coordination among its opponents, and the use of advanced technology, including artificial intelligence misinformation systems.</p><p>The period since the 2022 truce allowed the Huthis to strengthen and improve their strategy and acquire even more sophisticated weaponry. Their intervention against Israel between late 2023 and 2025 gave them an international popularity boost. Links and support from Hezbollah and Iran contributed to their military skills, assisted by the purchase of advanced technological elements on the international market.</p><p>They have also benefited from AI advances, as was demonstrated recently by their <a href="https://www.ft.com/content/8310cf56-ce60-4e6e-8254-5bb470e9a880?syn-25a6b1a6=1">attempted use</a> of Anthropic’s Claude to develop a missile and then to identify the cause of its failure. The Huthis have long since demonstrated the absurdity of dismissing their movement as a bunch of wild, sandal-wearing tribesmen armed with handguns.</p><p>Partly as a consequence of the military battering suffered in 2025 from the fifty-two-day US bombing campaign and a number of well-targeted Israeli air strikes, Ansar Allah initially chose to stay on the sidelines of the US-Israeli war against Iran. It expressed support for Iran but only launched a few missiles against Israel in late March, thus maintaining the image of being anti-Israeli rather than pro-Iran.</p><p>It is only since the breakdown of the “Islamabad Memorandum of Understanding” in late June that the Huthis have taken an active role in the Red Sea. Instead of closing the Bab al-Mandab Strait altogether, following Iranian statements that this option was an additional weapon in the struggle to control the world hydrocarbon market, the Huthis limited their blockade to Saudi shipping. They made a mutual nonaggression deal with the <a href="https://thehill.com/policy/defense/6101604-houthis-rebels-yemen-red-sea-saudi-arabia/">United States</a>, stating that they would not interfere with shipping from any other country.</p><p>One should note that this implies Israeli shipping is also welcome to use the Red Sea, contrary to the Huthi basic slogan “Death to America, Death to Israel!” and raising questions about their ideological commitments. Between March and July, the Saudis had transferred most of their oil exports through the East–West Pipeline to reach the sea, thus minimizing the disruption to their trade resulting from the Gulf blockades.</p><p>Attacks on Saudi shipping in August reduced the amount of oil exported from Saudi Arabia’s Yanbu port from five million barrels per day to fewer than two million. This was in addition to the considerable additional cost and time needed to reach the East Asian market, as oil has to be transported all the way around Africa. This has contributed to the world oil crisis.</p></div></section><section id="sec-2"><header><h2>The Huthi Offensives</h2></header><div><p>The Huthis had a number of reasons to initiate the fighting at this time. The twenty million people under their rule are suffering worsening poverty due to the growing economic impact of the US designation of Ansar Allah as a “foreign terrorist organization.” This has been combined with the almost complete withdrawal of humanitarian aid to Huthi-ruled areas.</p><p>Although popular suffering is not a major motivation for Ansar Allah, poverty reduces potential sources of taxation, which is needed to finance military salaries and the purchase of weaponry. The closer relationship of Saudi Arabia with the IRG that followed the exclusion of Emirati-backed southern separatists in early 2026 was also an emerging threat. This was linked to efforts to overcome the remaining divisions within IRG-linked forces.</p><p>Internationally, the Huthis were concerned about Saudi Arabia’s nascent initiatives, such as the Mecca Defence Alliance with Pakistan and Turkey and the Multinational Maritime Defense Coalition. The latter is a defensive naval alliance formed in July 2026 to protect shipping, international trade, and energy supply lines from Huthi attacks.</p><p>The international situation will also have encouraged Huthi leaders, suggesting to them that neither the United States nor Israel was likely to focus on Yemen or Saudi Arabia while preoccupied with forthcoming elections and their ongoing, stalemated wars. Combined with a widespread sense of exhaustion over the “no war, no peace” situation, this will have motivated the Huthis to go on the attack while they were still clearly the stronger military entity.</p><p>In July, the Saudis bombed the runway of Sana’a airport to prevent an Iranian aircraft from landing. Ansar Allah used this as a pretext to justify escalation. It demanded an end to all blockades on Yemen and described Saudi Arabia as its main enemy, reviving the decade-old discourse and barely mentioning its Yemeni opponents.</p><p>Starting in August, the offensive rapidly shifted from the better-defended Marib region, where the Huthis had failed to break through prior to the truce, to the southern Red Sea coast. Their rapid successes here made it possible to take Mokha and reach the Bab al-Mandab Strait and its islands by September 10.</p><p>Although fighting persists in Marib and Saada, the main focus is now Taiz governorate and its capital, which is under siege and suffering both military and humanitarian emergencies. While conditions in Taiz are extreme, the city reflects a wider pattern of IRG fragmentation and offers the best site from which to examine Yemen’s political divisions.</p><p>Taiz has been the focus of fighting between the Huthis and their opponents throughout the decade, with parts of the city and governorate under the control of either side. Long considered the country’s intellectual capital, it is home to the strongest elements of all political forces, from Salafis at one extreme to the Yemeni Socialist Party at the other, as well as a multiplicity of armed groups.</p><p>As well as resisting the Huthis for the past decade, these forces have also fought against each other. At different times, military groups connected with al-Qaeda, the Islah party, Tareq Saleh’s National Resistance forces, and other elements have fought for control of the city and its sources of income. Today, in the face of a possible complete takeover by the Huthis, their opponents face an urgent need to overcome these differences.</p></div></section><section id="sec-3"><header><h2>The IRG’s Weaknesses</h2></header><div><p>The rapid failure of Saudi-backed IRG forces in September came as a shock. Lack of coordination into a single effective command and rivalries between units demonstrated that the process of military restructuring that had been implemented since February was far from complete.</p><p>As elsewhere in Yemen, patience was running thin with the “no war, no peace” situation, and the IRG was getting ready for the resumption of fighting. In response to the Huthi offensive, it launched the “Dawn of Yemen” counteroffensive in early October. This move successfully recovered some territory in the vicinity of the strait, but it has stalled without being able to break the siege of Taiz, despite some gains in the far north.</p><p>There is no doubt that the IRG seriously underestimated Huthi technological capacities, and it may also have failed to develop its own skills in that sector. The absence of ground-based cadres certainly contributes to strategic failures, such as the one that resulted in the massacre of seventy-three new recruits and the wounding of more than two hundred in Shabwa on October 19.</p><p>The “Dawn of Yemen” offensive aims to defeat the Huthis. To achieve that task, it would require unity, a sophisticated overall perspective, and preparations for a long-term struggle. Yemenis throughout the country desperately long for an end to the war with a reasonable agreement that would allow them to focus on recovery and development.</p><p>The IRG is not the Saudi mercenary force that the Huthis speak of in their propaganda. But it cannot win the war on its own for both financial and political reasons, so it needs Saudi backing. Unfortunately, Saudi political influence remains a fundamental feature of the scene in Yemen that we cannot ignore.</p></div></section><section id="sec-4"><header><h2>Saudi Dilemmas</h2></header><div><p>Ansar Allah has also been launching missile attacks on Saudi Arabia that are regular and often lethal. This has had a considerable impact on the Saudi economy. The latest highly publicized international event to have been postponed to better days was the annual “Davos in the Desert” investment conference. This followed a series of less prominent cancellations, all of which have affected the regime’s reputation and its ability to attract investment.</p><p>Saudi Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman must bitterly regret his initial decision to go to war against the Huthis in 2015 and has been trying to extricate his country from the Yemen quagmire since 2020. Negotiators were close to reaching a deal in late 2023, but the Gaza genocide and the US-Israeli war against Iran put paid to those efforts. While Iran is unlikely to be directly responsible for Huthi attacks on Saudi Arabia, the contribution of those attacks to pressure on world hydrocarbon supplies helps Tehran in its stand-off with the United States.</p><p>In the long run, Saudi vulnerability also weakens its potential for regional domination. The kingdom’s malaise has revealed the failure of the massive bribes it has dispensed over the course of decades to buy support in its hour of need. In spite of the recent international agreements, the rulers of Egypt and Pakistan are only offering limited assistance.</p><p>British and French contributions will not change the course of the war, and the billions Riyadh has promised to Trump have not persuaded Washington to throw its weight on the scales. Having spent billions more on high-tech weaponry, mostly from the United States, the Saudi military finds itself unable to stop Huthi missiles, due to a lack of interceptors and the vastness of their country. Saudi Arabia now stands alone, facing the Huthis directly within its borders.</p><p>Saudi Arabia’s experience since 2015 has confirmed that air strikes alone do not win a war. This has certainly contributed to the regime’s hesitation about deploying its military in Yemen once again — a military that already has a reputation as a “parade” force. But the IRG ground forces will need aerial support if they are going to reverse the Huthi gains of recent months.</p><p>Huthi calls for major financial and political concessions from the Saudi regime become more and more unrealistic as they continue their strikes on Saudi infrastructure, raising the issue of Ansar Allah’s objectives. The dilemma for the Saudi regime worsens by the day: if it wants to reach a deal with the Huthis, that will require unacceptable and unfeasible concessions, but if it continues launching air strikes against their forces in Yemen, there will be more retaliation against targets within the kingdom.</p><p>It is difficult to see Iran’s offer to mediate with the Huthis as anything other than an attempt to persuade the Saudis to make major concessions. Quiet mediation by Oman is also unlikely to achieve much while the Huthis believe they are on a winning streak. Meanwhile, millions of Yemenis are now in a state of deepening crisis, with hunger and the lack of medical supplies compounded by the risk of bombing, and without any end or hope in sight.</p></div></section><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/yemen-war-houthis-saudi-arabia?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-23T19:43:21.966635Z</published><summary type="text">A sudden offensive by Ansar Allah this summer took its Yemeni opponents and their Saudi allies by surprise. But the resumption of conflict is likely to be long and protracted, with disastrous consequences for Yemen’s civilian population.</summary></entry><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/baseball-milwaukee-brewers-socialism-veeck</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/baseball-milwaukee-brewers-socialism-veeck"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/jpeg" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/749143577058.jpg"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/749143577058.jpg" medium="image" type="image/jpeg"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/749143577058.jpg"/><title type="text">Milwaukee’s Proud History of Baseball — and Socialism</title><updated>2026-10-23T20:21:26.424982Z</updated><author><name>Peter Dreier</name></author><category label="History" term="History"/><category label="Politics" term="Politics"/><category label="Sports" term="Sports"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><div><p>Organizers like to say that all politics boils down to a battle between organized money and organized people. Candidates with the largest war chests tend to win, but contenders who refuse to take donations from corporate interests can prevail if their supporters are well-organized, inspired, and strategic. Likewise, big employers can spend huge sums on union busting, but employees can win union organizing drives if they know how to mobilize workers to stick together and not be intimidated.</p><p>The same is true in baseball. Teams in big markets with large payrolls have a decided advantage when it comes to recruiting talented players who command huge salaries, but feisty, scrappy teams with fewer stars can sometimes win championships. Since 2000, more than 80 percent of the teams that have advanced to the World Series ranked in the top half of league payrolls. Teams with the five largest payrolls (out of thirty teams) account for roughly 38 percent of all World Series contestants and nearly half (48 percent) of all World Series champions.</p><p>But this year is an exception: the World Series contestants — the Milwaukee Brewers and the Tampa Bay Rays — are both among the poorer teams in baseball. Milwaukee is Major League Baseball’s smallest market in terms of population size and TV audience and ranks nineteenth in payroll ($143.5 million). Tampa Bay is twenty-fifth in market size and ranks twenty-sixth in payroll ($98.3 million).</p><p>The top-spending teams are the New York Mets ($346.8 million) and the Los Angeles Dodgers ($338 million). Despite the disparity, the Brewers swept the Dodgers in four games in the National League Championship Series to make it to the World Series, thwarting LA’s hopes to win three consecutive World Series. The Brewers and Rays won their respective leagues by combining strong pitching, agile and savvy “small ball” play, and because of managers who utilized their rosters to get the most out of teams without many highly paid superstars.</p><p>During the first half of the twentieth century, in both politics and baseball, Milwaukee’s have-nots often beat the odds. And indeed, those two histories are intertwined in ways not often appreciated.</p></div><section id="sec-1"><header><h2>Milwaukee’s Sewer Socialists</h2></header><div><p>In the early 1900s, <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/09/sewer-socialism-berger-mamdani-pragmatism-organizing">Milwaukee’s socialists</a> came to power by forging an alliance with the city’s labor movement. The city’s culture was heavily shaped by German immigrants, whose athletic and gymnastic clubs embedded the ideal of a “sound mind in a sound body.” One of them, Turner Hall, built in 1883 near the city’s downtown, served as a gathering place for Milwaukee’s radicals and socialists. It provided its members a place to socialize, listen to music, drink beer, and discuss politics. <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/debs-biography-socialism-class-race">Eugene Debs</a> gave his first speech as a Socialist there in 1898 and spoke at Turner Hall on many other occasions. (It remains a popular site for meetings and performances, with a gym in the basement.)</p><p>One of Turner Hall’s members was Victor Berger, an Austrian Jewish immigrant who spearheaded the Socialist Party’s rise to local power. Berger was a schoolteacher, an editor of two newspapers (one in German, another in English), and a skilled organizer. He and Debs helped found the Socialist Party of America (SP) in 1901. Berger built the Milwaukee branch into a formidable political machine. He secured the backing of the unions, including the powerful brewery workers’ locals and most German and Polish immigrants. The SP sponsored carnivals, picnics, singing societies, and even Sunday schools, conducting their campaigns in English, German, and Polish.</p><p>In 1910, Milwaukee voters sent Berger to Washington as the country’s first socialist congressman. He lost his seat in 1912 but was elected again in 1918 and in a 1919 special election; both times the House refused to seat him because of his opposition to World War I. He returned to Congress in 1922, served three terms, and lost his seat in 1928.</p><p>Berger sponsored bills for old-age pensions, government ownership of the radio industry, abolition of child labor, self-government for the District of Columbia, and a system of public works to provide relief for the unemployed. He also sponsored resolutions to withdraw federal troops from the Mexican border, for the abolition of the <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/06/the-socialist-who-tried-to-abolish-the-senate">Senate</a> (which was then not yet elected directly by the voters and was nicknamed the “millionaires’ club”), for women’s suffrage, and for federal ownership of the railroads.</p><p>While none of Berger’s proposals gained much traction in Congress, his comrades in Milwaukee were a dominant force in the city’s civic life. In 1912, some 1,200 SP members held public office in 340 cities and towns across the United States, including Socialist mayors in Schenectady and Berkeley; Socialists would later win the mayor’s office in Minneapolis (1916) and Reading (1927). But Socialists’ most enduring success emerged in Milwaukee. Between 1910 and 1960, Milwaukee was led for nearly forty years by three Socialist mayors — Emil Seidel (1910–12), Daniel Hoan (1916–1940), and Frank Zeidler (1948–1960) — and also boasted a number of city council and school board members.</p><p>“The workers of our city are its most valuable asset,” Seidel, a woodcarver and union leader, said in his inaugural address. During his two-year term, the city adopted an eight-hour day for municipal employees and increased their minimum wage from $1.75 to $2.00 a day. In 1910, the city added chlorine to the lake water, which sharply reduced the incidence of typhoid. A few years later, following a huge outbreak of diarrhea, the city stopped mixing raw sewage with drinking water.</p><figure><img alt="Milwaukee Mayor Daniel Hoan, circa 1930 " height="2400" loading="lazy" src="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/588020589518.jpg" width="2000"/><figcaption>Milwaukee Mayor Daniel Hoan, circa 1930 (<cite>San Francisco Examiner</cite> / <a href="https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/">CC BY 4.0</a>)</figcaption></figure><p>Opposed by Milwaukee’s business establishment, Seidel lost the 1912 election. That year he was the SP’s vice-presidential candidate, running alongside Debs. They gained 6 percent of the national vote, 8.4 percent in Wisconsin, and 27 percent in Milwaukee County.</p><p>In 1916, the Milwaukee Socialists made a dramatic comeback, catapulting city attorney Daniel Webster Hoan into office. Hoan served as mayor until 1940. Detractors initially mocked them as “sewer socialists,” because they focused heavily on solving practical problems, not on revolutionary Marxist ideas. In 1936, <cite>Time</cite> magazine put Hoan on its cover and praised Milwaukee as “one of the best-run cities in the U.S.”</p><p>Milwaukee’s voters kept reelecting Hoan because he ran efficient and humane administrations, showing it was possible to both expand public services and balance the city’s budget. The socialists expanded public education for the city’s working-class children (including free textbooks, lunches, and dental and medical programs), created an adult education program for workers, expanded the public libraries and playgrounds, and improved teachers’ salaries.</p><p>In 1923, Socialist Charles Whitnall — a onetime city treasurer and founder of the Commonwealth Mutual Savings Bank for workers — created a master plan for a network of beautiful parks and protected the city’s Lake Michigan lakefront from development, to ensure the working class would have access to the beaches and other recreation areas. As a result, Milwaukee had the nation’s best municipal park system. In 1923, the Socialists built the country’s first city-sponsored public housing project, Garden Homes. They inaugurated a public bus system to replace the street trolleys that ran down the middle of the road, causing accidents and injuring pedestrians.</p><p>Under Hoan, the Socialists adopted tough factory and building regulations and inspections, reined in police brutality against striking workers, improved working conditions for rank-and-file cops, and sponsored public markets. They gave preference to union shops for city contracts for everything from printing to horseshoeing. Hoan pushed for a law that allowed the mayor to close any factory if the employer refused to negotiate with the workers. The Socialists forced the city’s private streetcar company to pave the streets, lower fares, improve service, and pay fees to the city in exchange for its monopoly. They opened a municipal quarry to provide crushed rock for street projects, built a municipally owned water system, and created a pioneering sanitation infrastructure.</p><p>In 1925, the city built the Jones Island water treatment plant, one of the first facilities of its kind, and still in operation. From the start, Milwaukee recycled its sewage sludge as Milorganite (for <cite>Mil</cite>waukee <cite>Org</cite>anic <cite>Nit</cite>rog<em>e</em>n), a fertilizer used on parks, golf courses, and lawns around the country. The treatment plant is now run by the <a href="http://www.mmsd.com/">Milwaukee Metropolitan Sewerage District</a>. It sells about 47,000 tons of Milorganite each year, which generates over $12 million in annual revenue for the city, turning a waste management cost into a major revenue stream.</p><p>In 1932, voters elected Socialist labor lawyer Max Raskin — great-uncle of Jamie Raskin, currently a progressive congressman from Maryland — as city attorney. A close Hoan ally, Raskin was attacked by a conservative newspaper for refusing to prosecute “communistic rioters” — meaning strikers and protesters. Raskin required his assistant city attorneys to end any employment in private practice, which had been a source of corruption and conflicts of interest.</p><p>Zeidler, the third Socialist mayor, was elected in 1948. He was a popular figure who shared the progressive values of his socialist predecessors, but by then the business community had gained greater influence; at least one major employer threatened to fire employees who voted for Zeidler.</p><p>During his twelve years as mayor, the city doubled its geographic size by annexing nearby areas. In 1957, <cite>Fortune</cite> magazine called Milwaukee one of the two best-governed large cities in the country. During his time as mayor, Milwaukee’s black population nearly tripled, reaching 8 percent of the population by 1960. Among other measures, Zeidler pushed for the construction of racially integrated public housing. His political enemies tried to use his strong support for the civil rights movement against him, including spreading false rumors that he had erected billboards in the South urging African Americans to move to Milwaukee to take advantage of its liberal welfare programs.</p></div></section><section id="sec-2"><header><h2>Business Ascends, Milwaukee Declines</h2></header><div><p>After Zeidler left office, the city was governed by several business-friendly mayors, which coincided with the city’s dramatic decline starting in the 1960s, from the eleventh to the thirty-first largest city in the country. Its population dropped from 741,000 people in 1960 to about 562,000 today, 23 percent of whom live below the poverty line. Banks fostered white flight to the suburbs by redlining Milwaukee’s neighborhoods. Today the Milwaukee area is one of the most racially segregated regions in the country.</p><p>Milwaukee’s economy has never recovered from the massive job and population decline. A. O. Smith, the giant manufacturer of water heaters, boilers, and car frames, founded in 1874, still has its global headquarters in Milwaukee, but its production plants are now located in the American South as well as China, Mexico, India, and Turkey. Almost eight thousand union employees once worked at its factory on the city’s northwest side. After being abandoned for many years, the site is now an industrial park, but the number of employees is a small fraction of the former A. O. Smith workforce.</p><p>Milwaukee was once home to brewery giants like Pabst, Schlitz (which promoted itself as “the beer that made Milwaukee famous”), Blatz, and Miller. In 1905, Milwaukee had 3,809 brewery workers in just eight major companies. It reached its peak in 1953, when Milwaukee had over 7,100 unionized brewery workers. Today a conglomerate called Molson Coors dominates the local beer industry. It employs about 1,200 people in Milwaukee in its main Miller brewery and its corporate offices. Many local draft breweries dot the area, but they produce a relatively small volume per worker compared to the large factories that once called Milwaukee home.</p></div></section><section id="sec-3"><header><h2>Bill Veeck, Baseball’s Radical Owner</h2></header><div><p>Milwaukee’s working class embraced baseball as well as socialism. The city was home to minor league, employer-sponsored, semi-pro, and amateur teams. It was a hotbed for talent, particularly during the first half of the twentieth century. Since 1900, at least sixty-three Milwaukee natives have played in the majors, including such stars as Al Simmons (originally Aloysius Szymanski) and Tony Kubek (both of Polish descent) and Ken Keltner and Harvey Kuenn (both from blue-collar families of German ancestry). About another two hundred major leaguers have come from the rest of Wisconsin.</p><figure><img alt="A photograph of Bill Veeck from 1944" height="686" loading="lazy" src="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/097078386767.jpg" width="535"/><figcaption>Bill Veeck, pictured in 1944 while recovering from injuries sustained in World War II (US Marine Corps) </figcaption></figure><p>Starting in 1878, Milwaukee sponsored several teams in the early days of professional baseball, none of which lasted for more than a few years. Teams called the Brewers participated in the Western Association from 1888 to 1891, the American Association in 1891, the Western League from 1892 to 1899, and the American League in 1900 and 1901. The longest-lasting franchise, from 1902 to 1952, was the Brewers team in the top-level minor league, the American Association.</p><p>The Brewers, as well as the Negro National League’s Milwaukee Bears (1923) and the Milwaukee Chicks of the All American Girls Professional Baseball League (1944), played at the quirky, wooden Borchert Field, a privately owned stadium on the city’s North Side. Built in 1888 to accommodate five thousand spectators, its capacity grew to eighteen thousand after several expansions.</p><p>Ironically, baseball’s greatest maverick, Bill Veeck, then only twenty-seven, purchased the bankrupt, last-place minor-league Brewers in 1941, the year after Hoan was defeated for reelection. Born in 1914, Veeck grew up in baseball. His father was a sportswriter who wound up as president of the Chicago Cubs. He dropped out of college after his father died and did odd jobs for the Cubs. He had an unusual appreciation (for a white fan) for Negro League players.</p><p>He put together a syndicate of investors to buy the Brewers, a struggling Triple-A team in the American Association. He was the last owner to purchase a baseball franchise without an independent fortune. During his five seasons as Brewers owner, Veeck revolutionized the game.</p><p>Veeck was both a shrewd businessman and a radical reformer. He voted for perennial Socialist Party presidential candidate Norman Thomas even after Thomas had died. “I’d rather vote for a dead man with class than two live bums,” he later said.</p><p>Veeck loved to sit in the bleachers and hang out with the working-class fans. He packed Borchert Field during World War II by scheduling Brewers’ games in the morning so that workers on the late shift at war plants could attend games. He also served a breakfast of cornflakes at the game. He staged free days for cab drivers and bartenders.</p><p>In Milwaukee, Veeck began giving away promotion prizes — caps, a keg of nails, bottles of soda, pizza, and even animals (turkeys, geese, pigs, lobsters, and rabbits) — to attract fans to the park. Veeck modernized and cleaned the stadium’s restrooms specifically to make the ballpark more welcoming to female fans, a vastly underserved market at the time. He gave away orchids to women fans on Mother’s Day. He staged weddings at home plate.</p><figure><img alt="A 1947 photograph of pitcher Satchel Paige" height="599" loading="lazy" src="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/848140221132.jpg" width="456"/><figcaption>Satchel Paige in 1947 (ACME Newspictures)</figcaption></figure><p>Sportswriters dubbed him “the [P. T.] Barnum of Baseball.” But he wasn’t just a showman. Despite a shoestring budget, he took the Brewers from last place in 1941 to a second-place finish in 1942, followed by three consecutive American Association pennants from 1943 to 1945; the Brewers’ attendance shattered minor league records. Veeck used similar promotional strategies when he purchased the Cleveland Indians in 1946. He owned the St Louis Browns (1951–53) and bought the Chicago White Sox (1959–1961, 1975–1981).</p><p>Throughout his life, Veeck was an ardent anti-racist. When he purchased the Brewers, he inherited the team’s spring training facility in Ocala, Florida. During one game, Veeck decided to sit in the “colored” section of the stands. The local police showed up, told him he couldn’t sit there, and ordered him to move, threatening to arrest him for violating Florida’s Jim Crow laws. He told the town’s mayor that he’d move the team’s lucrative spring training program out of Ocala if they arrested him. They didn’t, but he moved the Brewers anyway.</p><p>In 1947, Veeck’s Cleveland Indians hired Larry Doby, the first black player in the American League. The next year, he made Negro League star Satchel Paige, then forty-two-years old, the first black pitcher in the league. That team won the 1948 World Series. He joined the local NAACP and appeared, along with Doby and Paige, on a poster designed to recruit new members to the civil rights organization, featuring the phrase, “The NAACP gets the ball for you.” When he owned the White Sox, he canceled the team’s spring training reservations at Miami’s McAllister Hotel when it refused to accommodate black players, moving the entire team to another hotel. In 1970, he testified in federal court on behalf of Cardinals’ African American outfielder Curt Flood, who was suing major league baseball to overturn the reserve clause, baseball’s version of indentured servitude.</p><p>Veeck expressed his socialist views when it came to baseball’s business side, too. At meetings of owners and in public statements, Veeck argued that wealthy teams in big markets should share revenue with teams in small markets to level the playing field and create a competitive balance. He contended that when his lowly St Louis Browns played the prosperous New York Yankees, they were entitled to a 50 percent share of the Yankees’ local television revenue, observing, “We’re half the show. They can’t play the game without us.”</p><p>The other owners hated Veeck and his ideas. Boston Red Sox owner Tom Yawkey called Veeck “that damned socialist.”</p></div></section><section id="sec-4"><header><h2>Corporatization Comes for Baseball</h2></header><div><p>After Veeck sold the Brewers, the team stayed in Milwaukee as a minor league franchise. In the late 1940s, the corporate-backed Greater Milwaukee Committee pushed for construction of a new publicly funded stadium with the explicit goal of attracting a major league franchise to the city. Their plan had some elements of the socialists’ focus on public works and recreational infrastructure, but it was hardly on behalf of the city’s working class.</p><p>County Stadium opened in April 1953 as the first major ballpark in the United States financed entirely with public funds. The new ballpark enticed the Boston Braves to Milwaukee. In 1952, the minor league Brewers had attracted 195,839 fans to Borchert Field. The following season, the Braves lured 1.8 million fans to County Stadium. To increase revenue, the stadium was also used for Green Bay Packers football games, religious services, concerts, ice skating, and other large events.</p><p>In 1957, the Braves, with stars like Hank Aaron, Warren Spahn, and Eddie Mathews, won the National League pennant and defeated the Yankees in the World Series. That season, attendance at County Stadium reached 2.2 million, first among the sixteen major league teams. The next season, the Braves again faced the Yankees in the World Series but lost four out of seven games.</p><p>The team’s on-field performance and attendance declined steadily after that. In 1965, only 555,584 fans showed up, as the Braves slipped to fifth place in the National League, while Milwaukee suffered from the loss of jobs and population. The following year, the team moved to Atlanta.</p><p>In 1970, as part of MLB expansion, car dealer Bud Selig brought together a group of investors and persuaded the other owners to approve another major league team in Milwaukee. He purchased the bankrupt Seattle Pilots, moved them to Milwaukee, and named the new team the Brewers after the minor league team he grew up watching.</p><figure><img alt="A 1960 Braves game at County Stadium" height="769" loading="lazy" src="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/228966047651.jpg" width="1024"/><figcaption>The Milwaukee Braves play at County Stadium in September 1960. (Robert Jahnke / <a href="https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/2.0/">CC BY 2.0</a>)</figcaption></figure><p>Starting in the late 1980s, Selig threatened to move the team out of Milwaukee if the state government didn’t build a modern, retractable-roof stadium. He claimed that the aging County Stadium couldn’t generate the revenue need to keep the team competitive, such as sales of luxury suites. In 1995, with the support of local business leaders, the politicians complied, enacting a 0.1 percent regional sales tax across five Wisconsin counties, in addition to funds from the state, county, and city.</p><p>Like its predecessor, the new stadium was built with public funds. Although business and civic leaders called it a public-private partnership, it was little more than crony capitalism. Taxpayers paid for the stadium but, under the lease agreement, didn’t share in the Brewers’ profits. The public paid $609 million to pay off the building costs, borrowing interest, and maintenance. The Milwaukee-based Lynde and Harry Bradley Foundation, known as a right-wing philanthropy, provided a $20 million loan.</p><p>The Brewers’ contribution was less than $40 million, almost all of it from the Miller Brewing Company, which paid the team that amount for naming rights. As a result, the stadium was called Miller Park from its opening in 2001 until the conclusion of the 2020 season. Despite investing so little in the ballpark, the Brewers own 36 percent of the facility, while the state-created Southeast Wisconsin Professional Baseball Park District owns the rest.</p><p>In 1998, Selig’s fellow owners named him baseball commissioner, and he put his financial stake in the team in a trust managed by his daughter Wendy. The family sold the Brewers in 2005 to Los Angeles investor Mark Attanasio, who still owns the team.</p><p>Twenty-two of Major League Baseball’s stadiums currently have corporate naming rights deals. In 2020, the Brewers switched their ballpark’s name from a brewery company’s to that of an insurance corporation. American Family Insurance, ranked 226 on the <cite>Fortune</cite> 500 list, with $19.6 billion in revenues, signed a fifteen-year agreement to pay about $4 million a year to change the stadium name to American Family Field.</p><p>Milwaukee’s early socialists would certainly be outraged that even though the stadium is publicly owned, the Brewers control corporate sponsorships and stadium naming rights and have used their political clout to block efforts to get the legislature to split sponsorship revenues equally between the team and the state. If the socialists still ran the city, or if Bill Veeck still owned the team, the Brewers might be playing in Victor Berger Field or Daniel Hoan Stadium.</p><figure><img alt="A 2005 photograph of Miller Park" height="900" loading="lazy" src="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/956537563538.jpg" width="1600"/><figcaption>Miller Park, now American Family Field, in 2005 (Jeramey Jannene / <a href="https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/2.0/">CC BY 2.0</a>)</figcaption></figure><p>In 2023, the Brewers persuaded Wisconsin lawmakers to subsidize renovations of American Family Field for around $500 million. Ryan Clancy, a Democratic Socialists of America (DSA) member who serves in the Wisconsin State Legislature and was previously a member of the Milwaukee County Board of Supervisors, was an outspoken opponent of using public funds for stadium renovations, which he calls “corporate socialism” and “corporate welfare.” Clancy thinks tax revenues should focus on local services such as public transit, parks, public safety, and housing, rather than subsidizing Attanasio’s team.</p><p>Attanasio paid $223 million to buy the Brewers in 2005; by 2016, the franchise was worth $875 million. Today the team is worth $1.9 billion, according to <cite>Forbes</cite>.</p><p>Baseball has been totally corporatized since Bill Veeck’s day. His entire career was devoted to baseball, and he was always in financial distress. In contrast, Attanasio, the latest Brewers’ owner, made his initial fortune with the private equity firm Crescent Capital Group. He not only owns the Brewers but is also majority shareholder of English football club Norwich City and part-owner of the American Hockey League’s Milwaukee Admirals. He is also on the board of directors for LA28, which oversees plans for the 2028 Olympic Games in Los Angeles. Although he’s hardly a progressive, much less a socialist, he is one of the few baseball owners who primarily contributes to Democratic candidates.</p><p>Although he has a net worth of $1.9 billion, Attanasio is among the poorest of the thirty MLB team owners. The wealthiest is Mets owner Steve Cohen, a Wall Street hedge fund tycoon with a net worth of $22 billion. Second is Edward Rogers III, who owns the Toronto Blue Jays and is worth $11 billion, according to <cite>Forbes</cite>. He inherited the telecommunications and media empire founded by his father, which includes Rogers Wireless, Rogers Cable (Canada’s largest cable TV provider), forty-six radio stations, seventy consumer and trade magazines, and the Blue Jays.</p><p>Mark Walter, the Dodgers’ largest shareholder, ranks third, with an estimated net worth between $7 billion and $13 billion. Walter is cofounder and CEO of the financial conglomerate Guggenheim Partners. Last year, he bought a majority stake in the Los Angeles Lakers basketball team and sold it just fourteen months later to former Disney CEO Bob Iger and Thrive Capital founder Joshua Kushner (Jared’s younger brother) at a $12.5 billion valuation — $2.5 billion more than the team was valued at when he bought it. Walter is also co-owner of the WNBA’s Los Angeles Sparks and is a major investor in England’s Chelsea football club.</p><p>The Brewers didn’t win their first pennant until 1982, when they played in the American League, and lost to the St Louis Cardinals in a seven-game World Series. The team shifted to the National League in 1998. It finally won another pennant this year, leading the majors with 103 wins.</p></div></section><section id="sec-5"><header><h2>Out of Left Field</h2></header><div><p>Debates over socialism are now shaking up both baseball and politics. By 1993, the revenue and payroll disparities in the MLB had become untenable. The small-market franchises were struggling to keep up with escalating player salaries in larger markets: the Yankees’ television and radio income was $47 million, while the Brewer’s collected only $5.5 million.</p><p>It wasn’t until the 1990s — following a strike by the Major League Baseball Players Association (MLBPA) — that baseball’s moguls adopted a version of Veeck’s decades-old revenue-sharing plan (although without giving him credit). Yankees owner George Steinbrenner was one of those who fiercely resisted any proposal to redistribute revenue. “I’m a charitable guy,” he said. “But I don’t like the idea of a socialist state. The Yankees shouldn’t be punished for their success.”</p><p>In January 1994, the owners approved a plan to pool local broadcasting and gate revenues to aid small-market clubs. But they made their plan contingent on the players’ union agreeing to a salary cap. The MLBPA rejected the deal, which it saw as a way to suppress player earnings and restrict the free-agent market. The owners rebuffed the union’s counterproposal, which included a luxury tax on the sixteen highest-payroll teams and putting 25 percent of all gate receipts into a pool that would be shared with the lowest-payroll teams.</p><p>The impasse led to a 232-day strike that canceled the 1994 World Series. It only ended in 1995 when federal judge Sonia Sotomayor (now a US Supreme Court justice) issued an injunction against the owners.</p><p>The collective bargaining agreement, finalized in 1997, severed revenue sharing from the idea of a salary cap. Under that landmark agreement, wealthy, large-market clubs transferred a portion of their local revenues to small-market teams, and a luxury tax was placed on high-spending teams to fund the revenue-sharing pool meant to level the playing field.</p><p>Despite these reforms, there’s still a wide gap in revenue and payroll between the thirty teams. Both the NFL and NBA have much more progressive formulas for leveling the playing field. MLB rules don’t require teams to spend their additional revenue on payroll. On average, teams spend about half their total revenue on salaries, but the range is dramatic. The Mets allocate about 90 percent of their revenue on player salaries, for instance, while the Marlins spend only 26 percent of their $317 million revenue on payroll.</p><p>Fans in some small markets have accused their teams of treating revenue-sharing as a profit center, not as a way to create a competitive balance. The Brewers are the most generous spenders among small-market teams, investing 41 percent of revenue into player salaries. But the small-market teams have a hard time retaining their best players because they can’t match the salary offers of the wealthier teams. The most expensive players are not going to play in Milwaukee, Pittsburgh, Miami, or Tampa Bay.</p><p>Baseball’s owners and the union are currently in the middle of negotiations over the next collective bargaining agreement. Under current Commissioner Rob Manfred, the owners are more adamant than ever that the union must agree to a salary cap. Close observers believe that it could lead the owners to initiate a lockout.</p><p>Many fans view baseball’s labor-management battles as a conflict between billionaires and millionaires. Twenty-seven of baseball’s thirty owners are billionaires. Only Colorado Rockies owner Dick Monfort (worth a mere $700 million), Miami Marlins owner Bruce Sherman ($500 million), and Cincinnati Reds owner Bob Castellini ($400 million) fall below the threshold.</p><p>Meanwhile, thanks to the players’ union and the end of the reserve clause in the 1970s, players’ salaries and working conditions have improved dramatically. The average player salary is $5.34 million, but this is heavily skewed by a small number of star players with enormous contracts. The median salary — $1.4 million — provides a more realistic picture. But even that figure is misleading, because the typical major league career is only five years. Most players are only short-term millionaires.</p><p>Attendance at major league games this season reached 71.7 million, close to the highest on record. The thirty teams generated $12 billion in revenue this year, the second highest amount in the sport’s history. The typical cost for a family of four to attend a major league game ranges from $159 for the Miami Marlins to $413 at Dodger Stadium in Los Angeles. In most major league ballparks, the workers who clean the stadiums, sell the food and concessions, and work in the parking lots are unionized with UNITE HERE or SEIU, but these are seasonal jobs and many of the employees have a hard time making ends meet. Baseball’s owners can afford to reduce the price of tickets, parking, and concessions for fans, and improve wages for stadium employees, without placing a cap on player salaries.</p><p>The cost of attending baseball games is part of the nation’s affordability crisis, itself a symptom of the widening gaps in wealth and income. It is one reason why socialism is gaining traction. Polls show growing support for socialism over capitalism, while the number of socialists elected to office is skyrocketing. Membership in DSA reached over 120,000 this year, a huge increase in just a decade.</p><p>These trends are reflected in Milwaukee. The local DSA chapter has grown from 350 members in 2025 to about one thousand today. (Madison, the state capital and home to the University of Wisconsin, has a similar number of members.) The dramatic spurt in members across the state made it possible for <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/08/hong-wisconsin-primary-loss-lessons">Francesca Hong</a>, one of four DSAers in the state legislature, to come close to winning the Democratic nomination for governor this year.</p><p>Alex Brower, a thirty-nine-year old DSA member and former union organizer, was elected to Milwaukee’s city council in 2025. He grew up in Wisconsin and is a stalwart Brewers fan. He is thrilled that his team will be in the current World Series. But he also views Major League Baseball as a big business that cares more about its profits than the lives of its customers (the fans) or its working-class employees.</p><p>The Milwaukee DSA chapter has been waging campaigns to municipalize the city’s private utility, restrict the repressive forces of Immigration and Customs Enforcement, protect tenants from unscrupulous landlords, and support workers’ union drives. Brower would eventually like to see DSA and its allies wage a campaign to bring the Brewers under public or community control, similar to the arrangement that governs the nearby <a href="https://jacobin.com/2025/09/green-bay-nfl-public-ownership">Green Bay Packers</a>.</p><p>Even though a government agency owns American Family Field, “the Brewers get all the benefits and the community gets nothing,” said Brower. He noted that zip code 53206, which is just a few miles from the stadium, is one of the poorest areas in the state. “The Brewer’s merch is flying off the shelves,” he said, while some of the poorest Milwaukeeans are paying a sales tax to finance and fix up the ballpark. “The rest of us have to pick up the tab, including paying for the cops who direct traffic on game days, and the wear and tear on the streets.”</p><p>“Milwaukee’s brewery workers were socialists,” Brower explained. “So shouldn’t the Milwaukee Brewers reflect that legacy?”</p><p>Daniel Hoan couldn’t have said it better.</p></div></section><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/baseball-milwaukee-brewers-socialism-veeck?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-23T17:52:12.911Z</published><summary type="text">The Milwaukee Brewers are in the World Series for the first time since 1982. The small-market team’s success this season is a reminder of Milwaukee baseball’s progressive heritage and the city’s proud socialist history.</summary></entry><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/vancouver-socialism-elections-cope-housing</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/vancouver-socialism-elections-cope-housing"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/jpeg" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/297328030653.jpg"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/297328030653.jpg" medium="image" type="image/jpeg"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/297328030653.jpg"/><title type="text">Vancouver Is in the Middle of a Socialist Surge</title><updated>2026-10-23T16:00:03.351976Z</updated><author><name>James Adair</name></author><category label="Politics" term="Politics"/><category label="Party Politics" term="Party Politics"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><div><p>Vancouver’s contrasts are visible on its streets. Luxury cars cruise past some of North America’s worst homeless encampments. Last Saturday, October 17, the city produced a political contrast to match: after four years of a center-right city hall, its municipal council has transformed into one of the most left-wing in North America.</p><p>The breakthrough comes alongside strong socialist showings in municipal elections around the world, from Zohran Mamdani’s win in New York to Die Linke’s recent state election victory in Berlin. The Coalition of Progressive Electors (COPE), a democratic socialist party, elected all twelve candidates it ran: four to council, four to school board, and four to park board. COPE’s Sean Orr topped the council ballot in raw votes. Together with the four Green councilors, OneCity’s sole council seat, and Green Mayor <a href="https://thetyee.ca/Analysis/2026/10/19/Fry-Is-Mayor-But-COPE-Is-Powerful/">Pete Fry</a>, COPE’s four council wins give the progressive bloc nine of ten councilor seats and the mayor’s office — ten of city hall’s eleven elected seats.</p><p>As right-leaning candidates made gains in other British Columbia municipalities, and as the social democratic New Democratic Party fought to retain power in the October 24 provincial election, COPE’s result testified to the party’s hard work and organizing efforts. It vindicated a party that was presumed dead after its near wipeout four years ago. <cite>The Breach</cite> reported <a href="https://breachmedia.ca/vancouvers-socialist-party-rebuild/">in depth</a> on COPE’s lengthy effort to rebuild its membership and organizing capacity, give members a meaningful role in shaping the party, and embrace its socialist identity rather than blur it into generic progressivism. That work positioned COPE to capitalize on the growing working-class discontent and the material realities of everyday life in Vancouver.</p></div><section id="sec-1"><header><h2>A City in Crisis</h2></header><div><p>Vancouver’s housing crisis formed the backdrop to COPE’s victory. More than <a href="https://vancouver.ca/files/cov/2022-10-14-city-of-vancouver-2021-census-housing-data.pdf">half</a> of the city’s households rent. In 2021, approximately 39 percent of renter households spent at least 30 percent of their income on shelter, while roughly one-quarter were in core housing need: their homes were unaffordable, unsuitable, or inadequate, and they could not afford acceptable alternatives. The problem extends beyond the poorest residents. Even relatively well-paid workers can struggle to find housing near their jobs, while homeownership is increasingly out of reach for younger people. Economic insecurity has become a defining feature of everyday life in the city.</p><p>ABC Vancouver came to power promising to address the problem by speeding up approvals and building more housing. Its administration can point to real increases in housing approvals and rental development. But more construction hasn’t made Vancouver affordable for many of the people who need homes.</p><p>In September 2026, a <a href="https://www.policyalternatives.ca/news-research/the-vancouver-condo-bailout-props-up-a-failed-housing-model/">report</a> found that more than five thousand completed condominiums across Metro Vancouver remained unsold, with an estimated value of $4.45 billion. The chasm between new housing and what people can afford was stark. Mayor Ken Sim’s city council also shuttered the Vancouver Renters Office, which provided resources and information on tenant rights and how to navigate the legal system.</p><p>Homelessness also increased in Vancouver under ABC. In contrast, COPE’s platform called for the city to acquire existing apartment buildings and convert them into permanently affordable public housing and co-ops. It also proposed a tax on properties worth more than $5 million to fund efforts to end homelessness, tripling the Empty Homes Tax, as well as stronger tenant protections. It put housing and care at the center of its strategy to respond to the city’s interlocking problems.</p><p>That emphasis was particularly significant in the Downtown Eastside, where COPE has historically maintained a strong base. The neighborhood has been at the center of Vancouver’s overlapping problems of poverty, housing insecurity, and drug poisoning. Its residents have endured these conditions through successive governments that have promised to restore order without providing the necessary housing and care.</p></div></section><section id="sec-2"><header><h2>The Campaign</h2></header><div><p>On Election Day, volunteers <a href="https://thetyee.ca/News/2026/10/17/Tracking-Vancouver-2026-Election-Results-Analysis/">reportedly</a> knocked on more than ten thousand doors. The campaign gave voters a positive vision of the city, championing socialized housing, public grocers, and expanded public services like Wi-Fi, libraries, and washrooms. Its “Fight for Vancouver” platform set out a high-level road map.</p><p>The slogan, “Evict Ken Sim,” aimed at the outgoing right-wing mayor, became a meme, appearing in art, on buttons dotting the city, and on campaign merch like T-shirts. COPE’s younger candidates, including <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/08/canada-municipal-elections-socialism-mamdani">Solomon Yi-Kieran</a>, Vancouver’s youngest-ever city councilor, and Chloe Leslie, brought passion and vitality to the party’s communications. Rather than imitating Zohran Mamdani’s style, they drew on Vancouver’s own culture, making high-energy, often playful social media videos.</p><p>The new council has an opportunity to reverse some of ABC’s policies and pursue shared progressive priorities. But a progressive majority is not the same thing as a socialist government, and the parties will not necessarily agree on how to use their power. COPE’s platform went much further than the Greens’ on important questions of public ownership and the role of municipal government. Its proposals for public acquisition of housing and taxes on high-value properties went beyond simply making private development easier.</p><p>The question is how much of this agenda COPE can persuade its coalition partners to adopt. Will the new council commit to a more ambitious public housing program? Will it restore tenant protections and supportive-housing investments? Will it redirect resources toward public services?</p><p>Just as important is how COPE will maintain its independent political identity while participating in a governing coalition. Building a movement from outside city hall can be easier than sustaining it once its representatives become responsible for budgets, compromises, and the day-to-day operations of government.</p></div></section><section id="sec-3"><header><h2>Moving Forward</h2></header><div><p>COPE’s members now have to decide how to use their electoral mandate. They can negotiate for improvements inside the council while continuing to organize tenants, workers, and neighborhoods to demand more from the new administration. The two approaches can complement and strengthen one another: COPE’s ability to mobilize people outside city hall may determine how much it can achieve inside.</p><p>The challenge will be to keep the routines of municipal government from displacing the organizing that made the victory possible. Sean Orr, first elected in a 2025 by-election, has demonstrated that he can be a serious legislator as well as an organizer; COPE’s new batch of councilors can draw on his experience as they orient themselves to the workings of city hall.</p><p>The coalition also faces a profound public safety challenge. Ken Sim’s council majority put two nonbinding <a href="https://vancouver.ca/your-government/2026-capital-plan-borrowing-questions-and-plebiscite-questions.aspx">plebiscites</a> on the ballot: one asked whether the city should toughen laws against open-air hard drug use in public spaces; the other asked whether the city should push the province to create a secure medical facility with voluntary as well as one-hundred-plus involuntary beds. Voters <a href="https://dailyhive.com/vancouver/vancouver-public-safety-plebiscite-october-2026-results">backed</a> both questions by roughly 68 percent.</p><p>COPE and the Greens <a href="https://www.cbc.ca/news/canada/british-columbia/vancouver-plebiscite-2026-drug-use-results-9.7390927">opposed</a> putting the question to a vote, but the results largely refute any claim that the new progressive majority has a clear mandate to counter these proposals. It is very likely that some of the same people who voted for COPE voted yes to the plebiscites. Vancouver has been at the center of Canada’s overdose crisis, and the incoming council will be responsible for addressing conflicting expectations about the best way to respond to visible street-level poverty, public drug use, and complex mental health and addiction challenges.</p><p>COPE will have to demonstrate that an approach rooted in housing, harm reduction, and public services can address residents’ concerns without abandoning its commitments to the people most affected by the crisis. The election does not resolve these questions. It makes them more urgent.</p><p>One part of COPE’s rebuild was reconnecting members with the party’s history. Organizers made a slideshow of its victories since its founding in the 1960s, giving members a sense of that history and purpose. From declaring Vancouver a nuclear-weapon-free zone to Sean Orr establishing an arts and culture land trust, COPE exists in a long line of struggles for better housing, care, and socialism in the city.</p><p>On October 17, the members gathered in a packed auditorium had good reason to pop champagne bottles, sing, and celebrate. They had done something many thought impossible. Socialism was back in Vancouver.</p></div></section><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/vancouver-socialism-elections-cope-housing?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-23T16:00:03.351976Z</published><summary type="text">Vancouver’s Coalition of Progressive Electors (COPE) elected all 12 candidates it ran in the city’s recent election. The democratic socialist party is now part of a progressive council majority.</summary></entry><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/election-bolsonaro-crime-corruption-scandal</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/election-bolsonaro-crime-corruption-scandal"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/jpeg" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/450146269412.jpg"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/450146269412.jpg" medium="image" type="image/jpeg"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/450146269412.jpg"/><title type="text">Lula Must Win. Now It Looks Like He Can.</title><updated>2026-10-23T14:59:13.837459Z</updated><author><name>Benjamin Fogel</name></author><category label="Politics" term="Politics"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><div><p>As Brazil heads to the polls on Sunday, the latest polls show Flávio Bolsonaro’s lead over incumbent president Luiz Inácio Lula da Silva narrowing. One pollster, <a href="https://www.reuters.com/world/americas/bolsonaros-lead-over-lula-narrows-ahead-brazil-runoff-quaest-poll-shows-2026-10-21/">Qeast</a>, had the eldest of Jair’s brood on 45 percent, just 1 point ahead of Lula.</p><p>Flávio’s rejection rates have been steadily climbing since he flopped in last Sunday’s debate. While there is a good chance Brazil may still elect the crooked son of a convicted idiot, three weeks after his first-round victory, it’s also clear that Lula is back in the game thanks to a historic mobilization.</p><p>Bolsonaro’s campaign has largely tried to keep him out of the limelight while portraying him as a more moderate version of his father and pushing anti-incumbent messaging through influencers and proxies. After winning the first round by 2 percent, Bolsonaro and his allies started acting as if the election was already in the bag and announcing bizarre potential cabinet appointments, such as a health minister opposed to the idea of health care as a universal right, which is enshrined in Brazil’s constitution. The right-winger’s pick (for now) as finance minister has talked about cutting the <i>Bolsa Família</i> welfare payment and other social programs.</p><p>Flávio’s emergence from the shadows during the second round has been accompanied by a constant flood of scandals around him. One story that broke this week in <cite><a href="https://piaui.uol.com.br/web/flavio-bolsonaro-churrasco-lancha-vacina/">Piaui</a></cite> <a href="https://piaui.uol.com.br/web/flavio-bolsonaro-churrasco-lancha-vacina/">magazine</a>, Brazil’s equivalent of the <cite>New Yorker</cite>, encapsulated his brand of moderation. During the height of the COVID-19 pandemic, when a thousand of his countrymen were dying daily, he partied on a boat with a vaccine lobbyist trying to hawk overpriced doses. The lobbyist reportedly gifted him a Rolex and brought along some prostitutes for the ride. In essence, Flávio was pro-vaccination provided he got a cut of the profits, an orgy, and a watch out of it — unlike his more ideological brother Eduardo, who has embraced US-style <a href="https://g1.globo.com/sp/sao-paulo/eleicoes/2026/noticia/2026/08/10/tebet-critica-falas-antivacina-de-eduardo-bolsonaro-durante-surto-de-sarampo-e-do-dna-da-familia-bolsonaro-ser-contra-a-ciencia.ghtml">anti-vax politics</a>.</p><p>After running a mostly complacent campaign for the first round this October 4, Lula’s campaign suddenly kicked into gear largely outside of the official structures of the Workers Party (PT). For instance, under the leadership of Minas Gerais lawmaker André Janones, there is a proper digital campaign this time around: a WhatsApp channel named “Lula’s Army” is deploying its now over 8.2 million followers on various missions. Targeted and organic online messaging, along with Flávio actually being forced to show the electorate who he really is, plus a historic wave of street mobilizations, give Lula a real chance of winning. Lula and the Left were also able to pass a historic victory for the labor movement in Brazil, reducing the working week to five days on, two days off on October 16.</p><p>It remains to be seen if this will be enough to overcome US intervention, overt manipulation by Big Tech, dirty tricks, constant electoral intervention from the Supreme Electoral Court (TSE) judges, in particular President Kassio Nunes Marques, through rulings favorable to the Bolsonaro clan’s scion, and what has been exposed as a corrupt network in major media firms invested in ensuring Lula’s defeat. News website PL noted: “Bizarre rulings . . . including the censorship of a campaign spot that merely presented Flávio’s criminal ‘track record’ based on reports published by major media outlets.” Another <cite><a href="https://piaui.uol.com.br/web/kassio-vorcaro-triplex-noite/">Piauí</a></cite> story suggested that Justice Nunes Marques attended a party with sex workers and high-end meats organized by disgraced banker and “big brother” of Flávio, Daniel Vorcaro, who is best thought of as the tropical Jeffrey Epstein; one of his <a href="https://www.bbc.com/portuguese/articles/ck4g18721rv2o">friends</a> even joked on WhatsApp that Jeff was an amateur compared to Vorcaro.</p></div><section id="sec-1"><header><h2>Post-Civil Society Electoral politics</h2></header><div><p>This is my third election in Brazil, and by far the most difficult to write about, in part because it has been, as Vincent Bevins <a href="https://www.northsouthnotes.org/">puts it</a>, “a post-civil society election.” Short-form video curated by individualized algorithms shapes political content in what remains of the public sphere more than traditional media or even the infamous disinformation channels on Telegram and WhatsApp used by the 2018 and 2022 Bolsonaro campaigns. Whereas last time there was a legion of YouTubers and budding podcasters shaping the narrative, this year there are thousands of Instagram and TikTok influencers doing that work; you would only know about them if you were locked into a particular algorithm from fitness to crypto and beauty for evangelical women.</p><p>This was evident in the farcical TV debate last Sunday where a heavily coached and stimulated Flávio stalked Lula around the stage and adopted the sordid debate tactics of professional life coach and former São Paulo mayoral candidate <a href="https://unherd.com/2022/09/the-self-help-guru-who-conquered-brazil/">Pablo Marçal</a>, who is <a href="https://www.riotimesonline.com/pablo-marcal-loses-two-more-appeals-and-stays-barred-to-2032/">banned</a> from politics until 2032 for lying about his assets in that campaign. Flávio has even floated the possibility of Marçal serving as his future “<a href="https://www.nexojornal.com.br/expresso/2026/10/20/banco-da-prosperidade-ministerio-flavio-bolsonaro-plabo-marcal">minister of prosperity</a>.”</p><p>The fact that fitness and beauty influencers, along with aspiring Brazilian streamers, are now pushing far-right narratives is part of what political scientist Miguel Lago describes as a right-wing <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/world/2026/oct/05/flavio-bolsonaro-brazilian-presidency-election-shock-first-round-victory">cultural revolution</a> in Brazil. Philosopher Rodrigo Nunes has discussed it in terms of the technologies of <a href="https://www.haymarketbooks.org/books/2881-anatomy-of-disintegration">social disintegration</a>. The ideology of entrepreneurship, grounded in the soaring app-based employment and the expanding attention economy, processes a right-wing common sense, in part because the world is increasingly experienced as a Hobbesian competition of all-against-all. For those parts of society locked out of traditional formal employment and top public universities, the world that Bolsonarismo describes seems a lot closer to their reality than the slogans of the Left.</p><p>Bolsonarismo’s digital ecosystem is not transparent; we don’t know how the dirty money is circulated, what negotiations take place outside of social media platforms, and how it organizes its internal relations. According to leading political scientist <a href="https://phenomenalworld.org/interviews/marcos-nobre/">Marcos Nobre</a>, drawing on Paolo Gerbaudo’s work, this has transformed Bolsonarismo into a militant digital mass party that commands around 25 percent of the vote at the same time as it has consumed the traditional rent-seeking parties of the <em><a href="https://catalyst-journal.com/2018/09/brazils-never-ending-crisis">centrão</a></em> (big center) through a traditional party infrastructure. Bolsonaro’s <a href="https://phenomenalworld.org/interviews/marcos-nobre/">Liberal Party</a> (PL) is now the dominant force in both Congress and the Senate. This has not come at the expense of the Left, which has actually increased its representation in Congress, but from old-school authoritarian, center-right, and slightly more democratic machine parties.</p></div></section><section id="sec-2"><header><h2>The Politics of the Street</h2></header><div><p>I <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/brazil-bolsonaro-trump-election-interference">described</a> the first round of the election as largely defined by apathetic polarization; the second round has been different. Lula’s Workers’ Party (PT) and its supporters have shown in recent weeks that they can mobilize millions of people in street rallies. In one sense, the final result will provide an indication of whether the politics of the street are enough to counter some of the effects of social disintegration.</p><p>From the moment the Right joined the June 2013 protests, which had started as a mobilization organized by radical autonomists against an increase in bus fares in São Paulo, up until the invasion of Brazil’s capital on January 8, 2023, by Bolsonaro supporters rebelling against his electoral defeat, reactionaries became the dominant political force on the streets.</p><p>They first did so by contesting the space with the new social movements of the Left, and emerging as the dominant force through the protests against then-President Dilma Rousseff in the wake of the Lava Jato anti-corruption investigation. This culminated in the constitutional coup that toppled Rousseff in 2016, followed by the imprisonment of Lula on spurious charges and Jair Bolsonaro’s presidential victory in 2018.</p><p>In office, Flávio’s father continued to mobilize his supporters through anti-democratic <a href="https://jacobin.com/2020/03/jair-bolsonaro-fuck-you-march-brazil">demonstrations</a> calling for a return to a government more akin to military dictatorship and targeting Brazil’s democratic institutions — particularly the Supreme Court — as well as motorcycle rallies and anti-COVID-restriction protests throughout his term. After he lost to Lula in the 2022 second-round vote, his supporters again took to the streets, using <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/world/2022/dec/22/brazil-bolsonaro-militants-lefist-lula-president">road blockades</a> in a particularly surreal fashion to contest the election results. In the January 8 protests, Brazil’s “January 6” moment, some quite literally defecated on the official symbols of the republic.</p><p>As we know now, this was part of an attempted coup in a country with a long history of violent putsches, <a href="https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/cr4dl19npv5o">planned</a> by a president who made his political career as a defender of a military coup and the worst crimes <a href="https://agenciabrasil.ebc.com.br/en/geral/noticia/2015-10/colonel-identified-left-wing-militant-torturer-died-brasilia">committed</a> under the dictatorship that ruled the country from 1964 to 1985. The plot involved the planned <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/world/2025/sep/12/operation-world-cup-the-plot-at-the-heart-of-brazils-jair-bolsonaro-trial-of-the-century">assassination</a> of Lula, his vice president, Geraldo Alckmin, and Supreme Court Justice Alexandre de Moraes, also known as “Xandão” (“Big Alex”).</p><p>After January 8, the Right went back to their homes, and the coup plotters were arrested, with Jair Bolsonaro himself ultimately convicted. Some of his confederates fled the country. Right-wing street protests ceased to be a regular feature of Brazilian politics. However, this did not weaken the far right: Congress was controlled by right-wing blocs, and their common sense continued to spread through the cultural revolution described earlier. The Right no longer needed to mobilize as an insurgent force. Today it has the dominant party in Congress in Bolsonaro’s PL.</p><p>The Left, on the other hand, has become the increasingly tired defender of the post-1988 constitution, now personified by Lula. The camp of both the prodemocratic center right and center left has been largely depleted: for the first time since Brazil’s return to democracy, in this year’s first round there was no center-left candidate competing with the PT. Most of the radical left, including factions that were earlier hostile to the PT, is now firmly behind Lula’s candidacy. But this entire prodemocratic camp, including its center-right and centrist elements, is viewed by the Bolsonaristas as “the Left.” For real Bolsonaro supporters, there is no real difference between graying centrists like Geraldo Alckmin, Xandão (appointed to the court by Michel Temer to protect his political interests and block any attempted prosecution) and blue-haired LGBTQ communists. For them, it’s all just “the establishment.”</p></div></section><section id="sec-3"><header><h2>Who Exactly Is Flávio Bolsonaro?</h2></header><div><p>Flávio is now the candidate of this empowered far-right bloc by virtue of his parentage. If there is any real difference between Flávio and his father — apart from the fact that Flávio is a baptized evangelical Christian and never had a military career — it is that the son operated in the highest, most crooked echelons of Rio de Janeiro politics. There he was widely liked and was invited to get involved in the bigger rackets, unlike his father. Flávio seems to be <a href="https://flaviogate.pagey.site/">connected</a> to every major corruption scandal, while his father was able to pose as an anti-corruption politician, because nobody liked him enough to get him involved in the big rackets of the 2000s and 2010s. Jair made do with the petty graft of small-time congressional deputies.</p><p>Flávio’s best friend, a crooked lawyer named Willer Tomaz, is involved in laundering over a billion dollars through <a href="https://www.cnnbrasil.com.br/blogs/elijonasmaia/politica/amigo-de-flavio-movimentou-r-66-bi-em-apostas-em-bet-mostra-processo/">online betting companies</a> on behalf of various mafia interests. He’s also neck-deep in a scandal involving billions of dollars’ worth of <a href="https://g1.globo.com/politica/noticia/2026/10/20/advogado-willer-tomaz-foi-o-maior-apostador-ddo-brasil-em-2025-aponta-secretaria-de-apostas.ghtml">Social Security fraud</a>; Tomaz allegedly had a <a href="https://g1.globo.com/politica/noticia/2026/10/21/pf-diz-que-encontrou-sala-secreta-com-maquina-de-contar-dinheiro-no-hangar-de-willer-tomaz-veja-imagens.ghtml">secret office</a> in a hangar at Brasilia airport to store the dirty money. Tomaz even took Flávio on a hunting trip to South Africa and, according to Tottenham football star <a href="https://www.thesun.co.uk/sport/40724780/richarlison-accuses-brazilian-politician-stealing-island/">Richarlison</a>, stole an island mansion he had bought on behalf of Flávio, among other things.</p><p>Flávio and Tomaz represent a new iteration of the fusion of politics and organized crime in Rio de Janeiro, where paramilitary mafias known as <a href="https://jacobin.com/2019/06/colombia-paramilitaries-bolsonaro-militias-fascism">Milícias</a>, the Military Police (PM), and evangelical churches work directly with Comando Vermelho (CV), recently designated by Donald Trump as a narco-terrorist organization, in racketeering, money laundering, and ensuring the right candidates get elected. Numerous close allies of Flávio have been apprehended by the Federal Police (PF) over the last few weeks as part of an operation involving laundering over $1.5 billion dollars, including <a href="https://www.poder360.com.br/poder-eleicoes-2026/mae-de-flavio-foi-escolhida-como-suplente-de-canella-preso-pela-pf/">Márcio Canella</a>, the second most-voted state deputy in Rio de Janeiro this election and ex-mayor of Belford Roxo, a satellite city of Rio notorious for organized crime. Flávio’s mother was selected as the substitute candidate for his campaign. Campaign materials for Canella were discovered at the home of the wife of notorious CV capo Márcio dos Santos Nepomuceno, better known as Marcinho VP. The effect was evident in the fact that Flávio won the areas of Rio <a href="https://oglobo.globo.com/blogs/ancelmo-gois/post/2026/10/flavio-bolsonaro-venceu-lula-nas-areas-controladas-pela-milicia-do-estado-do-rio.ghtml">controlled</a> by organized crime.</p><p>Flávio also had close ties to one of the most notorious hitmen in Brazilian history, the late <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/world/2020/feb/09/hitman-with-links-to-marielle-francos-killed-by-police">Adriano Magalhães da Nóbrega</a>. A former member of the BOPE, which is Rio’s more elite version of SWAT, before he was kicked out the police for murder, and leader of the <a href="https://insightcrime.org/brazil-organized-crime-news/escritorio-do-crime/">Crime Office</a>, an elite death squad working for various Rio mafias, the hitman was introduced to the Bolsonaro clan through a longtime family friend, former military policeman Fabrício Queiroz, who was accused of <a href="https://g1.globo.com/fantastico/noticia/2020/07/12/exclusivo-fantastico-revela-detalhes-do-inquerito-que-investiga-assassinato-envolvendo-queiroz-e-adriano.ghtml">murdering</a> a “trafficker” in 2003 with Adriano in the famous City of God favela when they were serving together in the PM. Adriano became Flávio’s <a href="https://oglobo.globo.com/rio/serie-pistoleiros-adriano-prodigio-da-turma-de-galaticos-do-bope-que-virou-matador-de-aluguel-1-25299401">shooting instructor</a>, while Queiroz was working as a driver for Flávio.</p><p>Flávio went on to nominate Adriano for the Tiradentes Medal — the highest honor that the Rio State Assembly hands out for public service — and hired the hitman’s wife and mother as part of his <a href="https://www1.folha.uol.com.br/internacional/en/brazil/2019/01/flavio-bolsonaro-kept-relatives-of-suspected-militia-commander-in-payroll.shtml">senatorial staff</a>, part of a suspected kickback scheme. Captain Adriano and the Crime Office, and their connections to the Bolsonaro clan, came to public attention following the murder of <a href="https://www1.folha.uol.com.br/internacional/en/brazil/2019/10/suspected-murderer-of-marielle-franco-asked-to-go-to-bolsonaros-house.shtml">Marielle Franco</a>, which was carried out by other members of the death squad, leading to his eventual death in a shoot-out with police in Bahia in 2020, in what most people believe was part of an attempt to “close the file on him,” as they say in Brazil.</p><p>If Flávio is elected president, it would mean the ascension of Rio’s mafia to the presidency as well as a victory for imperial Miami and the desecration of Brazil’s sovereignty. But the game is now over; Lula has momentum on his side and there is a final debate scheduled for Friday night where Flávio will have to avoid or deflect questions related to the piles of bodies and scandals connected to his political career, and even then this likely will not prove enough to get Lula over the line. But as history has shown, if anyone can pull of a political comeback, it is Lula, the most talented politician to have emerged over the last fifty years.</p></div></section><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/election-bolsonaro-crime-corruption-scandal?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-23T14:59:13.837459Z</published><summary type="text">Victory for Flávio Bolsonaro in Brazil’s election would bring mafiosi to power and reward interference by the White House and Miami reactionaries. In the final stretch of the campaign, Bolsonaro no longer looks invincible.</summary></entry><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/artificial-intelligence-investors-finance-bubble</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/artificial-intelligence-investors-finance-bubble"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/jpeg" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/460153696873.jpg"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/460153696873.jpg" medium="image" type="image/jpeg"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/460153696873.jpg"/><title type="text">Wall Street Is Getting Very Nervous About AI</title><updated>2026-10-23T13:39:11.046158Z</updated><author><name>Branko Marcetic</name></author><category label="Economy" term="Economy"/><category label="Science and Technology" term="Science and Technology"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><div><p>For an industry that we’re told is central to our collective future, the artificial intelligence (AI) industry increasingly seems to be built on a combination of artificially inflated hopes and bad accounting.</p><p>The industry’s critics have been raising concerns about its finances for a while: the fact that most of its flagship firms are grossly <a href="https://econjared.substack.com/p/ai-companies-are-in-a-race-against">unprofitable</a>, that they’ve had to <a href="https://www.forbes.com/councils/forbestechcouncil/2026/06/12/ai-costs-are-rising-businesses-are-paying-the-price/">jack up</a> their prices to try break even (leading their business customers to <a href="https://www.scmp.com/news/world/united-states-canada/article/3355439/firms-spent-heavily-ai-now-rising-costs-are-outpacing-its-value">pump the brakes</a> on using their products), or that many of the eye-popping investment announcements that are meant to show demand for AI is strong have actually been <a href="https://www.bis.org/publications/bulletin-137-circular-relationships-among-ai-firms">circular financing</a> — meaning different AI firms cycling money to and from each other.</p><p>But none of it has seemed to slow the industry’s boom or the relentless hype machine behind it. Until now, anyway. It used to be that you mostly heard concerns about the industry’s underlying economics in newspapers, blogs, social media posts, and podcasts, and that those concerns went completely unreflected in the markets. But these concerns seem now to have finally bled over into investors’ thinking.</p></div><section id="sec-1"><header><h2>Money Walks</h2></header><div><p>The price of bonds issued for the borrowing that undergirds the build-out of data centers has sharply <a href="https://www.ft.com/content/678bcd31-6c2a-447b-a68c-ce6dec220bbc?syn-25a6b1a6=1">dropped</a> in recent months, as has the bond price for “neocloud companies,” middleman firms that provide the computing power for AI firms who may not have their own data centers. The largest of these neoclouds, CoreWeave, recently saw its bonds <a href="https://www.bloomberg.com/news/articles/2026-10-14/coreweave-bonds-tumble-into-distress-drawing-yikes-from-musk">enter</a> distressed territory.</p><p>What does that mean? In short, that investors are suddenly abandoning the AI-related debt they’d happily financed until just a few months ago when it seemed like a great investment, because they’re <a href="https://www.reuters.com/legal/transactional/why-coreweaves-troubles-are-rattling-ai-boom-2026-10-15/">starting</a> to <a href="https://finance.yahoo.com/markets/stocks/articles/bond-market-sending-warning-nvidia-223000334.html">suspect</a> these firms are not actually going to end up being able to pay it off. Nearly half of the bonds raised this year to finance data center projects by some of the biggest tech firms are now <a href="https://www.forbes.com/sites/giacomotognini/2026/10/16/why-debt-laden-neoclouds-could-become-a-trillion-dollar-wework-20/">rated</a> “junk.”</p><p>At the same time, the market for credit default swaps (CDSs) for AI is <a href="https://www.ft.com/content/6dd31584-064c-4015-bf5d-e5747799ccd5">booming</a>, with the value traded of CDSs linked to major AI firms having more than quadrupled between July and September. Made famous by <a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UqYGWXMJ78I">their role</a> in the 2008 financial crisis, CDSs are basically insurance against future debt defaults, another sign of investor doubt that AI industry firms are actually good for the money they’ve borrowed to fund their build-out.</p><p>To put it plainly: the people who move money around for a living are starting to have serious doubts about how sustainable the AI boom actually is, and we know they are not because they’re just saying so, but because they’re <em>making financial decisions</em> as if they are.</p><p>What’s changed to bring this shift about? A number of things, including the fact that, some voices in the financial world now <em>are</em> saying so.</p><p>The AI industry’s current unprofitability was acceptable as long as it seemed plausible that, at some unspecified future date, this technology would actually start making money. But a spate of recent news and analysis has underscored the fantastical math behind AI firms’ accounting.</p><p>According to one highly cited Brookings Institution paper, the colossal amounts of money already being plowed into the AI build-out mean that US consumers and businessses will need to spend enough on the technology by 2032 to generate $3.5 trillion worth of revenue, or just shy of 9 percent of the country’s GDP, to make good on it. There is quite literally no precedent for this in American history — the railroad boom <a href="https://www.axios.com/2026/09/30/ai-profits-spending-hyperscalers">involved</a> capital spending more than an entire percentage point of US GDP smaller than the AI build-out. According to the <cite><a href="https://www.wsj.com/tech/ai/will-america-spend-9-of-its-gdp-on-ai-the-industry-is-counting-on-it-3501bb4f">Wall Street Journal</a></cite>, that would mean the nation spending around the same amount every year on AI as it currently does for food, or seven times the amount it spends on the internet, phones, and other communications combined.</p><p>Needless to say, this looks unlikely.</p><p>Last month, the chief economist of asset management firm Apollo <a href="https://www.apollo.com/insights-news/insights/daily-spark/tech-trillion-dollar-internal-inconsistency">pointed out</a> the wide gulf between the huge future operating cash flow that analysts are expecting for the tech sector specifically, and the much smaller future operating cash flow analysts are expecting for companies in other sectors. In other words, the businesses that are in theory meant to be the tech world’s customers are not even seriously expected to have the money on hand that tech firms are boasting they will extract from them.</p><p>Someone’s math here is off, and it’s reasonable to assume that it’s the AI firms’. Years of overoptimistic revenue projections and consistent money-losing from the sector were dramatically illustrated earlier this month when one prominent firm, Character.ai, filed for bankruptcy. In its filing, the company <a href="https://www.404media.co/character-ais-bankruptcy-documents-show-the-economics-of-ai-dont-work/">revealed</a> that it had been losing around $8–9 million per month over the course of this year — which it said was an <em>improvement</em> from previous years — and that its subscription revenue had only ever been a fraction of the amount it was spending on the computing needed to run its AI.</p></div></section><section id="sec-2"><header><h2>Risks Abound</h2></header><div><p>These fears were heightened by some bad news around several high-profile AI firm initial public offerings (IPOs), when a privately held company starts selling its shares to the general public for the first time.</p><p>First, OpenAI, the company behind ChatGPT, delayed its IPO over <a href="https://www.nytimes.com/2026/06/25/technology/openai-ipo-artificial-intelligence.html">internal worries</a> that it might end up a flop, because retail investors — basically, you and I if we got into the stock market — may not actually end up as eager to buy its shares as they hoped. Among the reasons why were general market uncertainty caused by the Iran war, growing skepticism toward AI, a spate of damaging headlines about the technology’s safety issues, and a stagnated user base for ChatGPT. The company has now had to <a href="https://www.ft.com/content/bb564eb1-79d4-4694-aa24-1155202a9abc?syn-25a6b1a6=1">pare back</a> its valuation for its latest round of funding due to a palpable drop in enthusiasm from investors.</p><p>Meanwhile, Claude’s maker Anthropic has made headlines for a prospectus — the document put out by a firm going public that explains the business and lays out its financial reality for possible investors — that has seemed to prove true every worry just laid out about AI’s business model. The latest version of the document, <a href="https://www.wsj.com/tech/ai/anthropic-revenue-growth-ipo-accaf0f1">obtained</a> by the <cite>Wall Street Journal</cite> this week, showed the firm posted a more than $80 billion loss this year, while its spending on computing and infrastructure is exponentially ballooning, its demand for computing capacity outstrips what is available, and its list of possible risk factors are <a href="https://www.reuters.com/business/finance/anthropic-warns-ai-may-pose-existential-risks-humanity-ipo-filing-2026-09-29/">longer</a> than the company description.</p><p>One of those risk factors has become a major general concern for AI investors: the growing public hatred of data centers and the push to restrict or even outright stop their continuing construction. Popular distaste for data centers cuts across party and ideological lines and has become a central issue in the upcoming midterm elections, making it more likely a government clampdown on them intensifies.</p><p>Just in the first half of this year, environmental activists and local residents have <a href="https://www.bloomberg.com/news/articles/2026-10-20/oracle-data-center-fight-hands-activists-path-to-us-wide-blitz">blocked</a> more than a hundred data centers worth roughly $198 billion in capital. That included a major project of Oracle’s in New Mexico that pushed the company into declaring <em>force majeure</em> — meaning, tear up a contract because of an unforeseen act of God — after having already spent <a href="https://kfoxtv.com/news/local/oracle-project-jupiter-has-brought-in-nearly-80m-in-taxes-7000-jobs-projected">millions</a>.</p><p>This is yet another, and an especially big, reason for investors in AI to worry they’re not going to get their money back. For AI companies to have any hope of meeting their already unrealistic revenue goals, data centers <em>have</em> to be built somewhere; but voters across the country are vehemently opposed to having them built in <em>their</em> neighborhoods, because they find them noisy, intrusive, harmful to the environment, and have a habit of <a href="https://www.psu.edu/news/research/story/ask-expert-are-data-centers-driving-my-electricity-bills">driving up</a> their electricity bills. So they’re organizing to have them restricted or outright banned, which is what they have done in more than <a href="https://heatmap.news/politics/data-center-local-laws-bans-total">five hundred</a> counties and municipalities. Something will have to give here.</p><p>That’s not to mention investor fears that they could be left holding the bag on data center debt. The Brookings study mentioned earlier <a href="https://www.brookings.edu/articles/the-10-trillion-question-financing-the-ai-buildout/">estimates</a> the AI data center build-out will cost a total of $10.3 trillion by 2032; market research firm Gartner <a href="https://www.bloomberg.com/news/articles/2026-10-15/ai-race-puts-3-5-trillion-at-write-down-risk-gartner-warns">estimates</a> that AI data center owners will have to generate a staggering <a href="https://www.bloomberg.com/news/articles/2026-10-15/ai-race-puts-3-5-trillion-at-write-down-risk-gartner-warns">$8.5 trillion</a> in revenue through 2030 to cover the build-out while making a decent return. These are enormous sums behind something that is being financed largely by <a href="https://financialpost.com/financial-times/ai-debt-worries-spark-surge-in-default-insurance-trading">massive</a> and <a href="https://finance.yahoo.com/markets/stocks/article/debt-is-fueling-the-ai-boom-and-warning-signs-are-flashing-094352460.html">rapidly growing</a> levels of borrowing.</p><p>On top of this is the fact that the chips AI firms rely on, and which they spend <a href="https://tomorrowsaffairs.com/who-will-pay-when-ai-chips-lose-value">billions</a> of dollars on, are becoming <a href="https://www.sfweekly.com/news/national/ais-400-bn-problem-are-chips-getting-old-too-fast/article_804c060f-6ed1-51fc-aeef-a151e6bc45d3.html">obsolete</a> quicker and quicker — much more rapidly than the lifespan many of these companies initially budgeted for. It’s another case of wishful accounting by the industry, and another reason to worry for investors, since borrowing by AI firms is often secured on the back of chips that will lose their value before the lifetime of the loan is up.</p><p>So it’s no wonder that investors are now souring on AI and hedging their bets in anticipation of a bubble bursting. That could come sooner than we think: Oracle, <a href="https://www.cnbc.com/2026/10/19/oracle-debt-faces-an-ai-stress-test-why-some-investors-arent-worried-.html">considered</a> a “bellwether” for the wider AI credit market, has seen its bonds <a href="https://www.barrons.com/articles/ai-oracle-stock-downgrade-917e4f5d">downgraded</a> to just above junk status. One economist <a href="https://www.cnbc.com/2026/10/19/coreweave-oracle-ai-credit-stress.html%20">believes</a> that if its bonds ever do hit that nadir, it would be a “sign of contagion” for the sector more widely.</p></div></section><section id="sec-3"><header><h2>Beyond AI</h2></header><div><p>The stakes here are high. By some <a href="https://www.federalreserve.gov/econres/notes/feds-notes/the-ai-buildout-and-the-economy-publicly-available-data-to-assess-ais-impact-20260717.html">estimates</a>, AI is now a leading pillar of the economy, making a bigger <a href="https://www.stlouisfed.org/on-the-economy/2026/jan/tracking-ai-contribution-gdp-growth">contribution</a> to GDP growth than the dot-com bubble did in 2000 before it burst, according to the Federal Reserve Bank of St Louis. So any AI slowdown would likely affect the wider economy, particularly the construction industry, where it’s driving a blue-collar <a href="https://www.businessinsider.com/blue-collar-jobs-data-center-spending-boom-2026-9">job boom</a>.</p><p>But maybe more important are the ripple effects it could have on the financial system. The <a href="https://www.reuters.com/business/finance/bank-england-sees-growing-risks-financial-stability-ai-2026-07-07/">Bank of England</a> and the <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/business/2026/oct/13/ai-share-crash-risk-global-imf-debt-corrowing-cyber-attacks">International Monetary Fund</a> have both singled out the shoddy economics behind the AI boom as a potential threat to global financial stability.</p><p>Jason Thomas, the head of investment firm Carlyle Group’s global research and investment strategy, has <a href="https://www.bloomberg.com/news/articles/2026-09-15/carlyle-s-thomas-says-ai-financing-echoes-pre-crisis-mortgages">warned</a> <a href="https://seekingalpha.com/news/4652174-limits-on-ai-financing-are-needed-before-the-buildout-grows-further-carlyle-s-jason-thomas">repeatedly</a> that he sees similarities between AI project financing and the subprime mortgage crisis. Lenders right now are not giving out money based on the economics of a project itself, he said, but on the ability of the firm sponsoring the project to swallow the liabilities if need be — similar to what they were doing in the years leading up to the 2008 crash. He warned that, given this, investors have far too much exposure to the industry than they should to breathe easy.</p><p>What’s notable about this is that Thomas isn’t just an analyst, but has skin in the game: the firm he works for, Carlyle, is heavily invested in the AI sector.</p><p>Tied up in this risk is the fact that many AI firms are building data centers without adequate <a href="https://app.ft.com/content/9cb63980-cd43-419d-a7e5-42039b9fd01e">insurance</a>, since the projects are simply too expensive, complex, and risky for many insurers to take on, leaving the companies building data centers on the hook for what could be billions of dollars of losses if something derails their construction. Also tied up in it is the $3 trillion <a href="https://prospect.org/2026/08/03/ai-bailout-could-be-baked-into-bubble-private-equity-life-insurers-loans/">private credit</a> industry, or what used to be called “shadow banking”: the private equity firms, asset managers, and other nonbank entities whose systemic risks have <a href="https://www.federalreserve.gov/newsevents/speech/tarullo20131122a.htm">long</a> <a href="https://www.imf.org/en/publications/fandd/issues/series/back-to-basics/shadow-banks">worried</a> financial analysts, since they act like banks but without any of the accompanying regulation, oversight, and government backstops.</p></div></section><section id="sec-4"><header><h2>Do Not Forget</h2></header><div><p>This doesn’t mean that a 2008-style crisis is necessarily in the cards. There is an ongoing <a href="https://www.reuters.com/legal/transactional/furious-pace-ai-investment-some-fed-officials-radar-now-2026-08-06/">debate</a> about the level of risk AI poses to wider financial stability, and there are <a href="https://am.jpmorgan.com/us/en/asset-management/adv/insights/market-insights/market-updates/on-the-minds-of-investors/how-much-of-the-ai-boom-is-adding-to-us-growth/">some experts</a> who <a href="https://www.washingtonpost.com/technology/2026/02/23/ai-economic-growth-gdp-mirage/%20%20">believe</a> AI’s contribution to the US economy is overstated. We won’t know exactly what the end of the AI boom will look like or how badly it will affect the rest of us until such a thing happens.</p><p>But it does seem implausible at this point to believe it won’t mean at least <em>some</em> significant amount of pain for US workers and households more generally.</p><p>What we can safely say is that the math behind both AI firms’ business model and their future fiscal projections simply don’t add up, and that we can be sure of this because the people who have actual money on the line — investors, bond traders, insurers — are acting like it. Despite the supposed rationality of markets and the private sector, the AI boom is looking more and more like yet another historical episode where herd thinking and hype is driving the high-risk decisions of private capital.</p><p>Beyond everything else, it’s a colossal waste of money. The gargantuan sums we’re talking about are comparable to what we should have started spending years ago on the renewable energy transition in order to prevent a climate catastrophe — a catastrophe that the AI build-out, perversely, is <a href="https://heated.world/p/ais-climate-problem-is-worse-than">making worse</a>.</p><p>Instead, because this money is concentrated in private hands, these resources are being plowed into an industry that doesn’t actually make money and seems to be built on wishful thinking. We see a similar thing <a href="https://www.nytimes.com/2026/09/20/business/china-ai-economy.html">happening</a> in China, where, because these decisions are made similarly undemocratically, vast sums are also thrown into one big bet on AI while the rest of the economy stagnates.</p><p>If this all does fall apart and the ripple effects of that collapse are as bad as some predict, it’s more than likely that taxpayers will be asked to <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/07/ai-policy-nationalization-commons-work">foot the bill</a> for another bailout. If and when that time comes, remember that there were umpteen warning signs and that it all could have been avoided.</p></div></section><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/artificial-intelligence-investors-finance-bubble?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-23T13:39:11.046158Z</published><summary type="text">If you want to know whether artificial intelligence is a gigantic economic bubble, don’t just take pundits’ word for it. Major investors are now moving their money to try to protect themselves from the AI bubble popping.</summary></entry><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/wickham-marxism-history-middle-ages</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/wickham-marxism-history-middle-ages"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/jpeg" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/738517670656.jpg"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/738517670656.jpg" medium="image" type="image/jpeg"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/738517670656.jpg"/><title type="text">Chris Wickham Revolutionized Our View of the Middle Ages</title><updated>2026-10-23T12:57:19.789674Z</updated><author><name>Paolo Tedesco</name></author><category label="History" term="History"/><category label="Theory" term="Theory"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><div><p>With the passing of Chris Wickham earlier this month, we have lost the greatest medieval historian since Marc Bloch, and one of the most original Marxist historians ever. In his career, which spanned half a century, Wickham wrote more than twenty books and two hundred articles. In these works, he showed how the social and economic structures of Europe and the Mediterranean transformed in the period from 500 to 1500. </p><p>Key factors in his analysis were the rise and fall of the state, the political and economic role of the landowning elites, and the protagonism of the peasants. His massive intellectual production revolutionized not only our idea of the Middle Ages but above all our understanding of how societies function and change across time.</p></div><section id="sec-1"><header><h2>Formative Years</h2></header><div><p>Chris Wickham was born on May 18, 1950, into a middle-class family in the Welsh village of Rossett. He attended a private school in Somerset, England, before beginning his studies at the University of Oxford in 1968, from which he graduated in 1971. During these years, he frequently traveled to Italy, becoming familiar with its early medieval landscape.</p><p>When he decided to undertake postgraduate research at Oxford, Wickham departed from the themes that were predominant at that time in British medieval studies, such as Anglo-Saxon England and Carolingian France. He focused instead on early medieval Italy with a thesis titled “Economy and Society in Eighth-Century Northern Tuscany,” which he completed in 1975.</p><p>After his PhD, he continued to teach at Oxford, traveling from time to time to Italy, where he started to participate in excavations with eminent archaeologists such as as Graeme Barker, Riccardo Francovich, and Richard Hodges. Fieldwork in Italy was certainly one of the experiences that shaped his approach to history for the rest of his life.</p><p>A second turning point in his career was his move to the University of Birmingham in 1977. Although this university no longer reflected the working-class lifeblood of the pre–World War II town, Birmingham still had a far greater number of students from middle-class and working-class backgrounds than Oxford and Cambridge did in the 1970s and ’80s.</p><p>Rodney Hilton, the most renowned historian of the medieval English peasantry, also taught there. Hilton belonged to the group of British Marxist historians that included such figures as E. P. Thompson, Christopher Hill, and Eric Hobsbawm. Their work shaped the emergence of history from below from the 1950s onward.</p><p>Hilton had an enormous intellectual influence on Wickham as well as on other young scholars, like the Byzantine historian John Haldon and the social scientist Gregor McLennan. They were all involved in politics, and Haldon and Wickham both joined the Communist Party of Great Britain (CPGB). Hilton had also been a party member before he resigned in 1956 after the Soviet invasion of Hungary. By the 1970s, the CPGB was rather more critical of the USSR and had condemned the invasion of Czechoslovakia in 1968.</p><p>Given his ties to Italy, Wickham also became a member of the much larger Italian Communist Party, which he saw as a model because of its history and ideas. Unfortunately, the effort of this small group of historians and militants to push the CPGB toward a Eurocommunist trajectory failed, and they all left the party before the end of the 1980s.</p><p>In our numerous conversations, Haldon very fondly recalled the meetings at Hilton’s house where the junior participants presented their Marxist interpretations of history to their severe but open-minded host. Hilton’s circle was a true laboratory of ideas in the 1980s.</p></div></section><section id="sec-2"><header><h2>The Making of a Marxist Historian</h2></header><div><p>In this cultural milieu, Wickham began to revise the dogmatic Marxist approach to medieval history that was still predominant at that time. In two seminal essays published in 1984 (“The Other Transition”) and in 1985 (“The Uniqueness of the East”), Wickham rejected the idea that a contrast between slavery and serfdom marked the transition from the ancient to the medieval world. Instead, he argued that these two historical periods had different political and economic organizations that he called “tributary” and “feudal” modes of production.</p><p>In the tributary regime, power was concentrated strongly in the hands of a ruling elite at the top of the political system. Tributary political structures ultimately depended on their capacity to extract sufficient revenues from the agricultural population to fund their centralized machinery of power, such as a court, a bureaucracy, and a salaried army. In feudal societies, in contrast, the means of coercion were in the hands of local landholding elites, with a fragile structure of rule at the top. The crucial factor for exercising power in such political formations was the direct ownership and control of the land.</p><p>Wickham also argued that when landlords or the state were not able to appropriate the surplus from the peasantry in a systematic way, an economic organization that he called the “peasant mode of production” became predominant. We can find several examples of such peasant economies in Europe and the Western Mediterranean from the sixth to the eighth centuries. He labeled the <a href="https://jacobin.com/2022/04/marxism-middle-ages-medieval-antiquity-economic-theory-history-capitalism">period</a> between the fall of Rome and the rise of the Carolingian Empire as a sort of “golden age of the peasantry.”</p><p>In the following years, Wickham demonstrated his ability as an unorthodox and open-minded Marxist historian by refining his interpretation on the basis of theoretical dialogue with other scholars as well as the results of his fieldwork. We can find evidence of his intellectual achievements in two monumental volumes written eighteen years apart: <cite>Framing the Early Middle Ages: Europe and the Mediterranean, 400</cite>–<cite>800</cite> (2005) and <cite>The Donkey and the Boat: Reinterpreting the Mediterranean Economy, 950</cite>–<cite>1180</cite> (2023).</p><p>In these works, Wickham rewrote the economic and social history of the Middle Ages, overturning some interpretative paradigms of past historiography, including his own original conception of “modes of production.” He made clear that his reinterpretation of the transitions from one historical period to another was deeply influenced by the theoretical reflections of two members of the Birmingham historical materialism group: John Haldon and the Turkish historian <a href="https://bristoluniversitypress.co.uk/mode-of-production-and-the-historiography-of-capitalism">Halil Berktay</a>.</p><p>In his new formulation, Wickham used the concept of modes of production exclusively to mark the passage from a preindustrial economic logic to that of capitalism. From this <a href="https://academic.oup.com/past/article-abstract/251/1/3/6254199?">perspective</a>, categories like tributary, feudal, or peasant no longer identified a given mode of production in the traditional Marxist sense. Instead, they referred to specific configurations of the societies predating the advent of capitalism.</p></div></section><section id="sec-3"><header><h2>Wickham’s Long Vision of History</h2></header><div><p>Expanding on this new interpretation, Wickham argued that three major cycles — ancient, medieval, and modern — have framed the economic configuration of Western Eurasia and Africa in the last two millennia. Beginning from a unified Mediterranean in the second century BCE under Roman expansion, the ancient trade cycle peaked in the imperial period (first to fourth centuries CE).</p><p>From that point, it began its decline in Western Europe around 500: at the same time, the Eastern Mediterranean kept flourishing for at least two centuries, until the collapse of the Eastern Roman Empire led to the fragmentation of the Mediterranean economic space. The second Mediterranean trade cycle emerged around 900 in southern and central Mediterranean regions such as Egypt, North Africa, and Sicily. The localization of Mediterranean economic life led to slow but steady growth over the following two centuries, expanding to encompass northern and central Italy in the twelfth century.</p><p>The differences between the ancient and medieval periods lie in the varying interventions of the state and landowning elites in the peasant economy: on the one hand, tax-raising by states; on the other, rent-taking by landlords. Their points of convergence “lie in the fact that, in both types of society, the peasant majority controlled the basic production <a href="https://bristoluniversitypress.co.uk/mode-of-production-and-the-historiography-of-capitalism">process</a>.” The state and the elites created infrastructures of exchange, but the access of peasants to larger surpluses and, consequently, the market for food and handcrafted goods made it possible for production and commerce to significantly increase.</p><p>This means that the scale of production, circulation, and consumption of bulk commodities generated by peasant demand was the most obvious proxy for the level of economic sophistication that ancient and medieval structures attained. Luxury goods historically entered the market only in response to the purchasing power of quantitatively limited elites. In this framework, “states and landlords could affect the production process by demanding different types of taxes or rents, thus curtailing the levels of commercialization of the peasant surpluses. However, they did not have a structural role in production, nor did they exercise forms of direct <a href="https://bristoluniversitypress.co.uk/mode-of-production-and-the-historiography-of-capitalism">control</a> over it.”</p><p>The start of the third economic cycle on the eve of the modern era saw the economy reorienting itself toward the Atlantic — a factor that historians have typically interpreted as the end of the medieval economy. The trade ties between Europe and the rest of the world greatly expanded in this new economic cycle, bringing with them new types of exploitation. According to Wickham, this final cycle, which gave rise to capitalism, deviated from the economic rationale of the other eras.</p><p>It was only at this historical juncture that peasants ultimately lost control of production and were forced to relocate to cities or factory towns, where they struggled to survive as proletarians completely exposed to the fluctuations of the market: “Under capitalism, in fact, capitalists dominate the labor process directly, and the exploitation involved is hidden by the apparently free nature of the wage-labor <a href="https://bristoluniversitypress.co.uk/mode-of-production-and-the-historiography-of-capitalism">contract</a>.”</p></div></section><section id="sec-4"><header><h2>From Peasants to the World Economy</h2></header><div><p>As a historian of the Middle Ages, Wickham was capable of moving from the minute study of local societies to the macroeconomic factors that shaped the world economy in premodern times. After his dissertation on Tuscan rural societies, he continued his research on Italian rural communities, from the countryside surrounding Lucca to the remote areas of Valva and the Biferno Valley in the central Apennines (<em>Studi sulla società degli Appennini nell’Alto Medioevo</em>, 1982; <em>Il problema dell’incastellamento nell’Italia centrale</em>, 1985; <cite>The Mountains and the City</cite>, 1988).</p><p>In these studies, he examined every aspect of people’s lives: How did peasants behave toward local authority figures, from the bishop or the aristocracy to the landlords? What strategies of negotiation or resistance did they undertake in court or on the ground to resist their powerful counterparts? Where did they live, and what did they produce and eat? What did they exchange, and under which conditions did this trade occur?</p><p>In essence, the key question Wickham asked in his research was why the society he was investigating worked in the way that it did. To answer this question, he moved to explore comparable communities in the Mediterranean and Europe, from the villages of Aphrodito and Jeme in central and Upper Egypt to those of central Anatolia, and from the interior of the Iberian Peninsula to the large plateau of the Île-de-France.</p><p>In <cite>Framing</cite>, he also invented a village, which he called Malling, to describe the archetypal rural community of Anglo-Saxon England. In a 2017 article, Wickham expanded his range of case studies enormously, even comparing Northern Italy and the Jiangnan region of China from the tenth to thirteenth centuries. As in his previous studies, Wickham concentrates on the structures of production and consumption of these two “highly complex economies by the standards of the period.” As he explains, no matter how global we want to be, “most of the economic interaction lay at local and regional levels.”</p><p>The recurrent theme through all these studies was the question of how a small minority of people loosely defined as elite managed to appropriate and channel the wealth produced by the rest of the population — the 90 percent addressed in the work of <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/04/bowes-roman-empire-workers-class">Kim Bowes</a> — while transforming (or failing to transform) the peasant economy from a local to a global-oriented structure.</p></div></section><section id="sec-5"><header><h2>Legacy</h2></header><div><p>In a fascinating <a href="https://serena.sharepress.it/rm/article/view/9090">interview</a> from 2022 with historians Charles West and Maria Elena Cortese, Wickham revealed that during his formative period at Oxford, he never had someone whom he considered his mentor. He built his scholarship through a massive and at times disordered reading of diverse literature and by exchanging ideas with his peers.</p><p>His intellectual formation was the result of a lateral collaboration between students of history rather than a vertical transfer of knowledge from a senior to a junior scholar. Wickham pursued this strategy even in the later stages of his career by participating in collaborative projects in which everybody was welcome to offer their contribution. For this reason, perhaps, Wickham never created a proper school in the traditional academic sense: a group of scholars who can be recognized as his students.</p><p>That said, he had an enormous impact on the way many of us write about history. A small group — including myself — embraced his Marxist approach to history, even though, in keeping with the leftist tradition, we never agreed on a single Marxist interpretation (Chris was glad of this variety). The majority appreciated his rigorous methodology, his ability to combine history, archaeology, and anthropology, and his deep familiarity with the scholarly tradition of each country he interacted with, through his research and through his personal and intellectual relations.</p><p>But the human factor made the true difference. Since he could not change the world the way he wanted, he introduced a sort of intellectual socialism in the academic world. We did not all have (or want to have) a master to follow, and we could not all go to Oxford to learn history, but we all had the chance to share our ideas with Chris Wickham: he was always there offering advice, comments, or criticisms.</p><p>Chris has left us an enormous legacy, a gift I like to call, paraphrasing the historian Giovanni Levi, “immaterial inheritance”: a rich and polyhedric constellation of methods, questions, and ideas that have fostered — and will indubitably keep fostering — deeply meaningful academic connections.</p></div></section><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/wickham-marxism-history-middle-ages?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-23T12:49:18.24Z</published><summary type="text">The British medieval historian Chris Wickham, who died earlier this month, transformed our understanding of the Middle Ages. Rooted in the great tradition of British Marxist historiography, Wickham covered a staggering range of case studies in his work.</summary></entry><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/big-tech-alphabet-meta-lawsuits</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/big-tech-alphabet-meta-lawsuits"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/jpeg" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/563543460124.jpg"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/563543460124.jpg" medium="image" type="image/jpeg"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/563543460124.jpg"/><title type="text">Lawsuits Can’t Restrain Big Tech</title><updated>2026-10-22T17:48:28.281216Z</updated><author><name>Rob Larson</name></author><category label="Law" term="Law"/><category label="Science and Technology" term="Science and Technology"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><div><p>When the government first filed major antitrust lawsuits targeting Big Tech back in 2020, many people were optimistic that the long-standing practice of public legal action against monopolistic companies could rein in these economy-dominating corporations.</p><p>But as <a href="https://jacobin.com/2025/01/google-antitrust-doj-monopoly">these</a> <a href="https://jacobin.com/2025/07/big-tech-trump-antitrust-lawsuits">pages</a> <a href="https://jacobin.com/2025/10/google-monopoly-lawsuit-big-tech">have</a> <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/06/big-tech-tobacco-lawsuits-profitability">covered</a>, this “techlash” has come to little. Antitrust law has conformed to its castrated character of recent decades, with the state unable to bring itself to seriously restrain, let alone break up, the giant companies even after they were ruled to be full monopolies just months before.</p><p>Recently, when it comes to enforcing the law against the tech giants, new lows have been reached.</p></div><section id="sec-1"><header><h2>“Neither Realistic nor Needed”</h2></header><div><p>Google’s first antitrust suit concerned its control of web search, and it was ruled to have operated a monopoly yet was given only a slap on the wrist. Rather than being broken up or forced to sell off any of its major corporate units like Chrome, the court imposed rather toothless “behavioral” remedies, barring exclusive default-search deals and requiring the company to share some search data with rivals.</p><p>A second case was brought by the Department of Justice in 2023 over Google’s “ad tech” business, an industry term referring to the segment of the company’s ad business that helps independent websites (such as news publishers) sell ads on their own pages. Google owns what are by far the dominant tools for this market, including the exchange itself (known as AdX) where advertisers find publishers as well as the servers that deliver the ad content. The company charges a 20 percent fee to run ad auctions for websites, which occur in fractions of a second as your browser opens the webpage in question.</p><p>It should be said at the outset that ad tech is a small part of Google — the $30 billion in revenue it brought in for 2025 comes to just <a href="https://www.nytimes.com/2026/09/02/technology/google-ad-tech-remedies.html">7 percent</a> of Alphabet’s total revenue, and that share has been in decline for years. The Justice Department wanted the court to force Google to sell off AdX.</p><p>The judge’s full opinion remained under seal for weeks while both sides were given the chance to redact confidential information from it. The now-revealed remedies include a requirement for Google to make its ad exchange interoperable with competitors, meaning that using Google’s marketplace for finding bidders wouldn’t lock publishers into using its other tools. It also forces the company to share some real-time bidding data with publishers.</p><p>But unsurprisingly, in Google’s second monopolist verdict in two years, the company was still <a href="https://www.nytimes.com/2026/09/16/technology/google-ad-tech-remedies.html">not subjected</a> to any form of breakup. Judge Leonie M. Brinkema found such a measure to be “neither realistic nor needed.” Instead she settled for narrower <a href="https://www.wsj.com/business/media/google-avoids-breakup-of-dominant-ad-tech-business-0eb492c0">measures</a> such as those mentioned above as well as obliging Google to retain a court-appointed monitor with limited power over the firm. The “remedies” will stay in place for only <a href="https://www.reuters.com/world/google-should-appoint-antitrust-compliance-officer-us-judge-says-ad-tech-case-2026-09-16/">six years</a>, rather than the fifteen years that the government sought. And Google of course plans to appeal the finding of monopolization, which will take some years.</p><p>The company is now an adjudicated monopolist twice over, but the liberal state has failed to even partially rewrite Alphabet.</p></div></section><section id="sec-2"><header><h2>Hang Together</h2></header><div><p>Meanwhile, the private arm of the techlash appears to be producing more serious consequences. Years of attempts by litigants to sue the platforms for their harmful content have failed, due to strong legal protections shielding the companies for material posted by users. But more recently, users have hit on the legal argument that the designs of the platforms themselves are harmful, and intentionally so.</p><p>Reporting and disclosures about such design choices have bolstered these cases, from the <cite>Wall Street Journal</cite> in its damning “Facebook Files” series that drew on leaked internal Meta research to company documents unsealed in court. (An illustrative <a href="https://www.nytimes.com/2026/08/28/technology/meta-social-media-big-tobacco.html">quote</a>: “Targeting 11 year olds feels like tobacco companies a couple decades ago [and today]. Like we’re seriously saying ‘we have to hook them young’ here.”) These revelations showed that company engineers and executives were quite aware of the addictive properties of now-common social media and online video platforms, including the infinite scroll of social media feeds, the autoplay algorithm of online video sites, and the regular barrage of push notifications that attempt to pull users back to the platforms.</p><p>Juries are finding for the plaintiffs in these cases, most famously for litigants in Los Angeles and New Mexico, where Meta is supposed to pay out hundreds of millions of dollars in total penalties. In August, Meta reached a major <a href="https://www.wsj.com/tech/meta-reaches-18-billion-settlement-with-48-states-over-child-safety-claims-cf725a2b?mod=hp_lead_pos2">settlement</a> with most of the US state attorneys general, which have sued the company on similar grounds of user harm.</p><p>That settlement involved both a cash payout and promised changes to Meta’s app designs. The settlement awards up to $18 billion to the forty-eight states, Washington, DC, and three territories taking part in the suit, to be apportioned based on the states’ populations. However, Meta will only pay out 70 percent of this amount unless YouTube and TikTok adopt similar changes and together pay an amount equal to the remaining 30 percent, about $5.3 billion. Even if Meta ends up paying the higher amount, the figure is quite small — according to the corporation’s most recent <a href="https://www.sec.gov/ix?doc=/Archives/edgar/data/0001326801/000162828026050705/meta-20260630.htm">10-Q filing</a> with the Securities and Exchange Commission, its last quarterly profit was $15.8 billion. So the settlement represents the company’s net income for just three months, but paid out over a decade, and at a time when Meta is firehosing money into a dubious data center build-out. For a payout that settles so much liability, and over two decades of operation, this sum is a wretched pittance.</p><p>The “behavioral” penalties, rules that the company is now obliged to follow, are also less than inspiring. Facebook and Instagram nominally require users under eighteen to use teen accounts, which are now mandated to include “night mode,” which blocks most app features between midnight and 6 a.m., and “school mode,” which prevents push notifications during school hours; minors will also be limited to two hours of use per day. Unless, of course, teen users can figure out how to circumvent the changes — for example by using their parents’ often-on phones to change the settings and disable these modes. But what teen is more tech savvy than their parents?</p></div></section><section id="sec-3"><header><h2>Nine-Tenths of the Law</h2></header><div><p>The public and private legal processes continue to grind along, with a Justice Department case against <a href="https://www.justice.gov/atr/case/us-and-plaintiff-states-v-apple-inc">Apple</a> and a Federal Trade Commission case against <a href="https://www.courtlistener.com/docket/67828404/federal-trade-commission-v-amazoncom-inc/">Amazon</a> still pending, and Meta continues to deal with thousands of civil lawsuits from individual users and school districts. But so far, neither of these legal routes looks very promising in terms of reining in the power of the Big Tech platforms.</p><p>What will it take to impose real penalties or constraints on the tech giants? Tech workers are seeking to <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/tech-workers-leverage-over-employers-is-shifting">organize</a> and use their leverage to demand change at the companies from within; meanwhile, politicians like Bernie Sanders have called for taking a <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/07/ai-nationalization-sanders-libertarians-property">50 percent stake</a> in the major artificial intelligence companies. Seeing the continued failures of the legal strategy to rein in Big Tech, it increasingly looks like we need organized tech workers and a political movement for real regulation and public control — up to and including the socialist solution of nationalization of their pivotal algorithms and networks. For companies that are apparently too big to break up, socialism may succeed where liberal regulatory efforts have failed.</p></div></section><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/big-tech-alphabet-meta-lawsuits?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-22T17:48:28.281216Z</published><summary type="text">This year has seen the resolution of major suits against tech giants Alphabet and Meta, both of which were found liable for serious lawbreaking. Yet the penalties imposed on the corporations are laughably inadequate to restrain their power.</summary></entry><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/evangelical-church-organization-retention-leadership</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/evangelical-church-organization-retention-leadership"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/jpeg" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/327293321022.jpg"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/327293321022.jpg" medium="image" type="image/jpeg"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/327293321022.jpg"/><title type="text">Evangelicals’ 10 Lessons in Leader Development for the Left</title><updated>2026-10-22T16:44:35.645834Z</updated><author><name>Eric Blanc</name></author><category label="Religion" term="Religion"/><category label="Strategy" term="Strategy"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><div><p>Last <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/evangelicals-warren-organizing-community-socialism">week</a>, I looked at what Rick Warren’s 1995 classic <cite>The Purpose Driven Church</cite> can teach the Left about recruitment in our atomized era. But getting people through the door is only half the battle. Seeker-sensitive evangelicalism didn’t buck America’s decades-long decline in membership organizations simply by attracting crowds. It couldn’t have grown without systematically turning newcomers into members, members into leaders, and leaders into recruiters.</p><p>As Warren puts it, “Our ultimate goal at Saddleback is to turn an audience into an army.” This is where the Left is weakest. Radical and progressive organizations generally lose most people we bring in and develop only a fraction of the rest into organizers able and willing to recruit those around them.</p><p>Survey data shows a dramatic difference between how today’s evangelicals and leftists recruit. Whereas 82 percent of megachurch attendees first heard of their church via a personal invitation from a coworker, friend, or family member, the same was true for only 21 percent of Democratic Socialists of America (DSA) members. This reliance on media rather than personal invitations is also the norm among progressives in the <a href="https://www.cambridge.org/core/elements/black-networks-matter/F1D7CC20FE798260F22D3E40ABE26A03">United States</a> and <a href="https://cusp.ac.uk/themes/p/xr-study/">abroad</a>.</p><figure><a href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/805238895961.jpg"><img alt="A bar graph comparison of how members of megachurches and Democratic Socialists of America members join their respective groups." height="764" loading="lazy" src="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/805238895961.jpg" width="936"/></a></figure><p>What would it take for the Left to turn this around? Many answers can be found in <cite>The Purpose Driven Church</cite>. More than a collection of organizing tips, it offers a model for how to generate self-reinforcing growth: belonging fosters commitment; commitment opens the door to training; training and responsibility develop leaders; and those leaders bring in new people who repeat the process.</p><p>In an era when community is far less likely to arise organically from daily life, moving toward a similarly systematic model is indispensable. Of course, leftists’ opponents are more powerful, and our organizations must be more democratic. But if we’re going to move beyond relying on social media and news headlines to recruit self-selecting, college-educated activists, we need to learn how to consistently develop supporters into leaders and recruiters. Warren’s model offers ten lessons for making that shift.</p></div><section id="sec-1"><header><h2>1. Get Smaller to Get Bigger</h2></header><div><p>At Saddleback, small groups consist of about a dozen people who meet weekly to collectively study, volunteer, break bread, and lend support to each other. They meet in homes because homes are free, relaxed, quicker to get to in sprawled-out Orange County, and “infinitely expandable.” Volunteer leaders run the small groups, with trained lay pastors overseeing group clusters.</p><p>Warren warns that when church is all lecture (“Sit still while I instill”), people can attend for a year without making a friend. He urges including some relational activity in every gathering and swears by weekend retreats: “The amount of time a person spends with other members at a single forty-eight-hour retreat is greater than the time they will spend together on Sundays over a year.”</p><p>Behind all this is a simple finding about why people stay. As Warren writes, “Relationships are the glue that holds a church together.” National <a href="https://hirr.hartfordinternational.edu/wp-content/uploads/2026/06/Megachurch-Resurgence.pdf">surveys</a> <a href="https://www.fact.hartsem.edu/megachurch/National%20Survey%20of%20Megachurch%20Attenders%20-final.pdf?">find</a> that about 40–60 percent of megachurch Sunday attendees participate in at least one small group.</p><p>Apart from strong union organizing committees, most of our organizations have no equivalent to evangelicals’ weekly small groups or the Belgian Workers’ Party’s analogous <em>groupes de base</em>.</p></div></section><section id="sec-2"><header><h2>2. Build a Robust Ladder of Commitment</h2></header><div><p>Warren explains that people sit at different levels of commitment and that an organization’s job is to move them up the ladder, step by step. Saddleback pictured this as five concentric circles, with the following mid-1990s figures:</p><p>•Community: 31,000 people who had visited at least four times in a year</p><p>•Crowd: 10,000 regular weekend attenders</p><p>•Congregation: 5,000 official members</p><p>•Committed: 3,500 members who had signed a covenant to pray daily, tithe, and join a small group</p><p>•Core: 1,500 lay ministers who ran the church’s work</p><figure><img alt="A graphic representation of the levels of membership commitment from evangelical pastor, Rick Warren" height="820" loading="lazy" src="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/572586137452.jpg" width="936"/></figure><p>The point is to systematically move them inward. “A crowd is not a church — but a crowd can be turned into a church,” he writes. And the process doesn’t end at the center: “What happens when people finally get to the core? We move them back out into the community for ministry!”</p><p>To make the ladder concrete, Saddleback used a baseball diamond. At each base, newcomers completed a class and signed a covenant: membership (101), maturity (201), ministry (301), and evangelism (401).</p><p>In most churches, members stall halfway around. To avoid this, Warren insists that the organization, not just the newcomer, is responsible for making the climb happen. “Many churches mistakenly assume that once a person has received Christ, the sale has been consummated, and it is now up to the new believer to follow through with his commitment and join the church. This is nonsense.” Instead, “It is the church’s responsibility to take the initiative in assimilating new people into the congregation.”</p><p>Many progressive and leftist chapters have some form of ladder of engagement, but few groups have made it anywhere near as visible and systematic as Saddleback. Too often, the ladder collapses into two rungs: a mass event (a rally, a canvass shift, an email list) and a small, burnt-out staff or volunteer cadre who do everything else, with few clearly laid-out steps in between.</p><p>As exciting as it is that DSA is now 130,000 strong, we shouldn’t overlook the fact that roughly two-thirds of members who joined during our first big surge after 2016 left within five years, and that almost half of all former members left after just one year. As was <a href="https://democraticleft.dsausa.org/2026/02/10/state-of-dsa-part-two-lessons-learned/">explained</a> earlier this year in <cite>Democratic Left</cite>, “overall, member retention rates are basically unchanged since 2020.” Imagine, instead, a clear path from event attendee to dues-paying member to small-group member to trained organizer who recruits others, with a short class and a clear commitment at each step. And not just in big electoral campaigns, but year-round.</p></div></section><section id="sec-3"><header><h2>3. Instill Ideology via Organizing</h2></header><div><p>Megachurches are often dismissed as superficial spectacles consisting of little more than charismatic preachers, self-help fluff, and smart marketing techniques. That’s true enough for some fringe Prosperity Gospel–type churches, but such a critique misses the mark when it comes to Warren’s theory or Saddleback’s <a href="https://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qfh03">practice</a>.</p><p>Community and appealing services help get people in the door, but ideology is also indispensable to the model, especially because it inspires the conviction needed to sustain members’ commitment. “No one stays with a difficult task unless they are convinced there is a good reason for doing so,” he notes. During Saddleback’s early years, when volunteers had to set up and tear down everything each Sunday, Warren found himself exhausted, lugging equipment after half the crew failed to show. His lesson: “You must know why you do what you do or else you’ll be defeated by discouragement.”</p><p>But Warren didn’t rely on sermons to spread conviction. “Conviction is contagious: People acquire it by being around other people who have it.” Proximity to conviction, Warren notes, is a major reason Saddleback emphasizes small groups.</p><p>Nor does Warren think recruitment can depend on big ideas alone; immediate needs are normally the main motivating factor: “While most unbelievers aren’t looking for truth, they are looking for relief. This gives us the opportunity to interest them in truth.” Once people were inside, Saddleback emphasized systematic ideological education, offering nine-month Bible study courses and a theology course covering twelve foundational Christian doctrines, taught twice weekly over twenty-seven weeks.</p><p>Progressive activists feel strongly about many issues but often lack an overarching way to make sense of the world and give meaning to individuals’ efforts within it. Socialists do have such an ideology — and a mass membership <a href="https://act.dsausa.org/donate/membership/">organization</a> through which to cultivate it. But unlike the relatively small, self-selecting, college-educated layer currently drawn to DSA and progressive causes, most people won’t be attracted by ideas alone.</p><p>As with churches, the initial draw for millions of working people will be relief from immediate problems. Once people join an organization, form relationships, and take on meaningful responsibilities, their convictions and views can deepen. Yet too many liberals and radicals remain captive to a particularly college-educated faith in the transformative power of ideas alone. Organizing normally requires a different sequence: bringing people together around immediate needs, deepening their convictions through participation, and helping them expand their understanding through collective study.</p></div></section><section id="sec-4"><header><h2>4. Ask for Big Commitments</h2></header><div><p>Many activists assume that asking too much will scare people off, but Warren argues the opposite is often the case. “I’ve discovered that challenging people to a serious commitment actually attracts people rather than repels them,” he writes. The reason is that people are hungry for meaning: “Many unbelievers are fed up and bored with what the world offers. They are looking for something greater than themselves, something worth giving their lives to.”</p><p>Not everybody can make big commitments; some will stay in the crowd, and that’s fine. But if you don’t regularly make big asks, you don’t provide others with the opportunity to step up.</p><p>Apart from a few fringe sects, most American Left and progressive organizations set a low bar for formal entry (though their insider culture often undermines mass recruitment and retention) but rarely help members take on more. Warren’s approach shows how to pair big asks with manageable steps. Saddleback’s maturity covenant, renewed annually, asked for three concrete habits (a daily devotional time, a tithe of 10 percent of income, and weekly small-group attendance), and members carried laminated covenant cards in their wallets.</p><p>This approach has financial implications. Whereas the vast majority of the nonprofit industrial complex is funded by wealthy foundations, 91 percent of the annual <a href="https://hirr.hartfordinternational.edu/wp-content/uploads/2026/06/Megachurch-Resurgence.pdf">income</a> of megachurches comes from tithes and dues. If your organization can’t rely on self-funding from below, that should raise major red flags about whether you are building meaningful stakes and ownership.</p><p>Warren observes that membership in many organizations and churches today is thin to the point of being almost meaningless. He tells of preaching at one church that “had over a thousand members on its roll but had less than two hundred people attending services! What is the value of having that kind of membership?”</p><p>Saddleback took the opposite approach. To join, you had to take Class 101, a four-hour class taught in a single day, with a quiz at the end on the church’s purposes. Then you signed a membership covenant, which included a pledge to invite the unchurched and to welcome visitors. Warren explains the logic: “I believe the most important class in a church is the membership class because it sets the tone and expectation level for everything else that follows. The very best time to elicit a strong commitment from your members is at the moment they join. If little is required to join, very little can be expected from your members later on.”</p><p>Membership also came with warmth. For years, Warren and his wife hosted a monthly “Pastor’s Chat” for new members and visitors in their home, and older members paid for the meals at quarterly banquets for new members. His test of whether assimilation is working is a nice one for any organization: “The community talks about ‘that church,’ the crowd talks about ‘this church,’ but the congregation talks about ‘our church.’ Members have a sense of ownership. They are contributors, not just consumers.”</p><p>Warren cites a Gallup finding that only 10 percent of church members were active in any ministry (i.e., volunteering within the church or through its community service). He adds that the “encouraging news that Gallup uncovered is this: 40 percent of all members have expressed an interest in having a ministry, but they have never been asked or they don’t know how. This group is an untapped gold mine!”</p><p>Warren learned this the hard way. In Saddleback’s early years, he and his wife Kay did nearly everything: setting up, taking down, printing bulletins, cleaning bathrooms, storing equipment in their garage. After a few years, he was burning out. So, at a midweek service, he confessed that he couldn’t do it all and offered the congregation a trade. “I’ll make you a deal. If you agree to do the ministry of this church, I’ll make sure you’re well fed!” Delegating responsibility worked. “After making this decision, Saddleback exploded with growth.” Today, 30 percent of megachurch <a href="https://hirr.hartfordinternational.edu/wp-content/uploads/2026/06/Megachurch-Resurgence.pdf">members</a> volunteer regularly.</p><p>Once people step up, trust them. “At Saddleback, the implementers are the decision makers. The people who do the ministry get to make their own decisions about that ministry. We do not separate authority from responsibility, but trust people with both.”</p><p>His favorite example: “One time a woman came to me and said, ‘We need a prayer ministry.’ I said, ‘I agree! You’re it!’” She asked whether she needed to be elected or approved first. He told her to just announce a meeting in the bulletin and start it. As he puts it, “You bring out the best in people by giving them a challenge, giving them control, and giving them the credit.”</p><p>Delegation and decision-making are trickier in democratic unions and political organizations, where individual initiative should remain consistent with agreed-upon goals. But within that framework, scaling up depends largely on empowering members to take on work and leadership responsibilities. As with all the lessons laid out here, we should experiment and see what works.</p></div></section><section id="sec-5"><header><h2>5. Treat Organizing as a Skill</h2></header><div><p>Warren rejects the idea that dedication is enough to grow, writing that “it takes more than dedication to lead a church to grow; it takes skill.” He even goes after prayer: “Somebody needs to boldly state the obvious: Prayer alone will not grow a church. Some of the greatest prayer warriors I know are pastors and members of dying churches.”</p><p>So Saddleback trained people constantly. Members attended one-day Life Skills Seminars covering specific skills, including how to get along with other people. “People must be taught how to develop relationships. Although this seems obvious, very few churches take time to teach their members how to relate to each other.” And Warren warns leaders never to demand something without showing people how to do it: “Exhortation without explanation leads to frustration.”</p><p>The Left has its own versions of “just pray harder.” One is “just stick with it, things will eventually turn around.” Another is “just have the right politics.” Dedication matters, and organizational solutions can’t solve bad politics. But especially in our hyperatomized society, organizing is a skill that must be learned, and even building relationships requires deliberate cultivation. The best unions already treat organizing this way, with regular trainings and mentoring that follow a learn-one, do-one, teach-one model. But beyond such progressive pockets, sustained training is rare.</p><p>It’s hard to see how the Left could recruit widely beyond self-selecting college-educated radicals until we give our members the skills and confidence to actively recruit their neighbors and until we make our organizations more welcoming, as laid out in part one of this series and in the work of <a href="https://kettering.org/hahrie-han-belonging-comes-before-belief/">Hahrie Han</a>. A 2021 national <a href="https://democraticleft.dsausa.org/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/2021_member_survey_gdc_report.pdf">survey</a> shows that over 80 percent of DSA members have a bachelor’s degree or higher — compared with 44 percent of nondenominational <a href="https://www.pewresearch.org/chart/how-educational-attainment-varies-among-evangelical-protestants/">evangelicals</a>.</p></div></section><section id="sec-6"><header><h2>6. Focus on External Work</h2></header><div><p>“Jesus did not say, ‘I have come that you might have meetings.’” Warren argues that the average church would be healthier if it cut half its meetings, since “[o]ne of the reasons church members don’t witness to their neighbors is because they don’t know them! They are always at church, attending meetings.” People’s time is scarce. So if a member offered four hours a week, “the last thing I would do would be to put him on some committee.”</p><p>Saddleback had no committees at all, relying instead on seventy-nine lay ministries. “Committees discuss it, but ministries do it.” Warren also notes who complains the most: “In a war, you always find the highest morale and sense of camaraderie among those serving on the front line. . . .  The biggest complainers in any church are usually committee members with nothing else to do.”</p><p>Milwaukee’s “sewer socialist” leader Victor Berger <a href="https://drive.google.com/file/d/1Xe_UUcHi77PZH6damsKKCLe2kM98jMLQ/view?usp=sharing">made</a> the same observation a century ago: “when people are constantly absorbed in doing things, and in preparing for still greater things, the petty jealousies and small causes for strife and dissension disappear.” Leftists should try to focus as much of our energy as possible on external work, not interminable factionalism and internal bureaucracy. Focusing outward, however, is challenging not just because democratic deliberation is essential, but because many of us prefer talking to each other, which is more comfortable than going out and trying to win over skeptics.</p></div></section><section id="sec-7"><header><h2>7. Combat Individualism</h2></header><div><p>Warren is blunt about the cultural enemy: “Our culture’s preoccupation with individualism and independence must be replaced with the biblical concepts of interdependence and mutuality.” And he admits that changing this is hard: “Believe me, it is an incredibly difficult task to lead people from self-centered consumerism to being servant-hearted Christians.”</p><p>Warren defines fellowship as mutual obligation: “In our church we define <em>koinonia</em> (fellowship) as ‘being as committed to each other as we are to Jesus Christ.’”</p><p>Leftist theory agrees that none of us are islands. But too often, we don’t build that belief into our culture. Instead, we often reproduce individualism by focusing on online posting and self-expression over pragmatically building collective power. Putting organization and collective goals ahead of individual egos and moral self-satisfaction should become our cultural norm.</p></div></section><section id="sec-8"><header><h2>8. Put Your Money Where Your Mission Is</h2></header><div><p>“The way we spend our time and the way we spend our money show what is really important to us, regardless of what we claim to believe,” writes Warren. This principle was evident from the start: before Saddleback’s first service, members of his tiny Bible study went about $6,500 into debt on their personal credit cards to pay for outreach. Warren describes the spending as an investment and warns that “[w]hen finances get tight in a church, often the first thing cut is the evangelism and advertising budget. That is the last thing you should cut. It is the source of new blood and life for your church.”</p><p>On the Left, how much money goes to reaching new people, and how much goes to maintaining existing operations? Solid numbers are hard to come by, but my impression is that only a tiny sliver of nonprofit and progressive funding goes toward external growth. And the labor movement certainly fails this test badly. Unions are sitting on over $35 billion in assets, yet most spend only a small share of their budgets on organizing the unorganized.</p></div></section><section id="sec-9"><header><h2>9. Develop Strong Leaders</h2></header><div><p>Warren is a big believer in strong leadership. “The most critical factor in a new ministry isn’t the idea, but the leadership,” he writes. In 1979, as a seminary student, he surveyed the hundred largest churches in America and found that many had long-serving pastors. For Warren, the lesson was that leadership continuity allows people to build the trust and relationships needed for lasting growth. But he also emphasizes that “healthy churches are built on a process, not on personalities.”</p><p>Much of the Left is still averse to leadership, or at least to strong leaders. That’s a mistake. We need to identify, develop, and empower people with the experience and skills to guide large numbers of people through struggle. And one of the most important tasks of strong leaders is to develop new leaders at all levels.</p><p>Of course, there are dangers: leaders can ossify or become detached from the membership. But the answer is robust democratic accountability, not a culture of horizontalism or musical chairs at the top.</p></div></section><section id="sec-10"><header><h2>10. Test, Measure, and Adjust</h2></header><div><p>Warren’s most important lesson may be his method. Saddleback treated retention and development with the same experimental spirit it applied to recruitment. Every month, the staff reviewed a six-page “Saddleback Snapshot” tracking how many people sat on each rung of the ladder. “The Snapshot forces us to take an honest look each month at how well our church is fulfilling its purposes. Bottlenecks in the system become easy to spot.”</p><p>Saddleback also ran three continuous feedback loops: first-impression cards from visitors, feedback cards from regular attenders (processing them took two full-time secretaries and a dozen volunteers), and staff evaluation sheets covering everything from parking to the sermon. Warren compares this to National Football League players reviewing game film every Monday. “Growing churches should always be asking, ‘How can we do it better?’ They are ruthless in evaluating their services and ministries.”</p><p>He’s equally skeptical of easy success stories. “Anytime you hear a pastor attribute the growth of his church to one single factor, realize that he is either oversimplifying what has occurred, or he may not be recognizing the real reason his church is growing.”</p><p>Saddleback was also part of a much larger ecosystem of learning. The Church Growth Movement, built on the research of Donald McGavran and others, spent decades studying what made congregations grow or die. Over the years, countless pastors have compared notes at seminars, and hundreds of reports have been published detailing what’s working and what’s not. Beyond exchanging lessons, evangelical networks and denominations raised funds, trained organizers, and provided seed funding to launch new churches and initiatives.</p><p>In Left organizations, by contrast, we tend to cherry-pick our wins, blame our losses on external factors, avoid honest postmortems, and stick with siloed routines instead of scaling up successful initiatives. If we want to build durable mass organizations, that should change.</p></div></section><section id="sec-11"><header><h2>Our Challenge</h2></header><div><p>None of this means copying evangelical churches wholesale. Not every practice will work for us, especially since Left organizations should operate democratically and confront oligarchic power.</p><p>Rebuilding connection and purpose in atomized America ultimately requires challenging big business, whose increased dominance over our workplaces, our neighborhoods, and our political system has left us alienated and alone. But taking on that power requires structures that can do more than recruit the already convinced: they must build lasting relationships among disconnected people, develop them into organizers, and equip them to recruit and lead others.</p><p>Three decades ago, evangelicals figured out how to build community in a disconnected society. Our challenge is to turn community-building into the collective power to change society itself.</p></div></section><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/evangelical-church-organization-retention-leadership?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-22T16:44:35.645834Z</published><summary type="text">Evangelical churches like Rick Warren’s wouldn’t be as massive as they are with real retention of members over time without a serious plan for member leadership development. The Left could learn from them.</summary></entry><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/frank-creativity-class-inequality-neoliberalism</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/frank-creativity-class-inequality-neoliberalism"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/jpeg" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/509191003234.jpg"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/509191003234.jpg" medium="image" type="image/jpeg"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/509191003234.jpg"/><title type="text">The Creativity Con Ate the Middle Class</title><updated>2026-10-23T23:21:02.749736Z</updated><author><name>Thomas Frank</name></author><category label="History" term="History"/><category label="Inequality" term="Inequality"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><div><p>The faiths and hopes of the postwar middle-class society have mostly evaporated today. Our parents’ beliefs in consensus and the goodness of American civilization have joined mainline Protestantism and the benevolent corporation on some nostalgia channel of discarded ideas. One signature ideal of that era has survived, however. Indeed, it thrives; it glows with an incandescence that time cannot dim. I am referring to our ongoing fascination with creativity, the human power that our affluent-society ancestors liked to believe made life worth living and that was, at the same time, responsible for the forward motion of civilization itself.</p><p>Every year brings a bumper crop of sunny new literature on this tired old subject. Self-help books tell us how to sharpen our skills and be more creative; Substack writers explore the fascinating details of mental performance; South by Southwest (SXSW) and its many imitators bring together practitioners of this colorful art; governments zone urban areas for innovative pursuits; foundations issue sumptuous prizes to the exceptionally creative; executives from industries like advertising and defense assure us of their dedication to the human imagination; and <a href="https://jacobin.com/2025/02/tech-workers-silicon-valley-trump">Silicon Valley</a> sells artificial intelligence as a creativity force multiplier — or, rather, it did before we started to fear AI as a <a href="https://jacobin.com/2023/05/ai-artificial-intelligence-art-creativity-reproduction-capitalism">creativity poison</a> that would blunt our mental skills if not obsolete them altogether.</p><p>The long-running appeal of creativity to middle-class Americans is easy to understand: it is an explanation for progress that seems to put them in history’s starring role. The reason our country is so successful, it assures us, is the day-to-day innovativeness of millions of ordinary but ingenious people. But the actual, real-world effects of creativity have been anything but healthy for the middle-class society. At every step in the long march to our current state of crushing plutocratic inequality, creativity’s holy name was invoked. The big tax cuts of the 1970s and ’80s were done in order to reinvigorate our creativity. Our leaders deregulated banks, did endless favors for tech and pharma, allowed deindustrialization to rust out the heartland, and ushered us generally into a “postindustrial” era in which working people lost their claim on middle-class prosperity — all in order to augment our powers of creativity and innovation.</p></div><section id="sec-1"><header><hr/></header><div><p>Creativity beguiles us because it dangles before us a beautiful synergy. “The Lamp That Lit the World Can Light Your Life,” declared the first chapter of one of the first big creativity self-help books (published in 1948), and what it meant was that the mental faculty that gave the world its thrilling art and music . . . the mental faculty that made America productive and prosperous above all nations . . . this same mental faculty would also make your humble, everyday life more vivid, more remunerative, more spiritually satisfying, even. Creativity would make you a better worker and a better person at the same time.</p><p>It was an irresistibly appealing idea. Unlike high-IQ brainpower, which is not accessible to most of us, creativity was supposed to be an almost universal faculty, a thing that everyone could access if they tried hard enough and read the right self-help book. Creativity is thus a democratic vision of human inequality, if such a thing is possible — “democratic yet elitist,” as the historian Samuel Franklin put it in his brilliant 2023 book, <cite>The Cult of Creativity</cite>. With a little work and a little guidance from experts on the imagination, it was said, we could all claim a personal chunk of the ineffable power wielded by Albert Einstein and Pablo Picasso: a life of prosperity and joy as we studied the great business tycoons and learned to think like artists.</p><p>Of course, some people always turned out to be more creative than others. Everyone had some helping of the newly discovered ability, yes, but the literature focused almost entirely on the creative potential found in the highly educated people at society’s upper reaches: executives, not line workers; military officers, not enlisted personnel; professionals, not the people who followed their prescriptions. Creativity was about human excellence, about individuals who succeeded — this is who we were to mimic, and this is who we were to become.</p><p>Creativity eventually became a project for government as well as for individuals, the central idea in a sweeping social vision that is espoused today by educators, tycoons, nongovernmental organizations (NGOs), and presidents. What sparked the idea’s leap was the launch of <cite>Sputnik</cite> in 1957, a Soviet triumph that deeply shocked an America that had taken its technological superiority as a matter of faith. Instead of hunting for traitors in physics labs and the State Department, as we had done earlier in the Cold War, the country chose to look inward this time. What Sputnik revealed, commentators concluded, was a national failure of the <em>imagination</em>. A chorus of Jeremiahs scolded us for having grown conformist and apathetic, beguiled by suburban homes and tail-finned cars. Thanks to our long, relaxing bath in the “easy artificiality” of affluence, warned the president of Yale University in 1958, “the fine edge of our faith has been dulled, our creative powers atrophied.” What we required, wrote two-time Democratic presidential candidate Adlai Stevenson, were “innovators, not organization men.” We needed “Creativity for Survival,” as a 1958 magazine headline put it. We had to celebrate nonconformity if America was to prevail.</p><p>The <cite>Sputnik</cite>-induced panic over insufficient creativity eventually morphed into one of those grand theories of Progress and the American Character of which our ancestors were so fond. Creativity, the experts declared, was a sort of precious raw material desperately required by complex technological societies like ours. Change was accelerating, blue-collar workers were in decline, and creativity at the top was the thing that would keep our corporations from becoming sterile and stagnant in capitalism’s ceaseless gale. Before too many years had passed, this theory had a name: the “postindustrial society.” America was now said to be a country in which “innovation,” creativity’s twin sibling and our national superpower, drove a kind of economic growth that would soon propel us far beyond the rest of the world.</p><p>Middle-class culture was saturated with creativity thought in those days. Education commentators pleaded for creative kids who didn’t fit in. Advertising executives began a “creative revolution,” selling cars and soda pops to help us smash the bonds of convention. Creativity was prized by student protesters of the era and also by the university presidents whose offices they occupied. Psychedelic drugs were said to be devices for instant creative enlightenment, and the young people who took them were reported to be exploring ultracreative forms of liberated consciousness.</p><p>It was an Age of Aquarius for middle-class Americans in their dawning postindustrial society. It was a world of enchantment and magic; of sprawling universities and national research labs; of nuclear power and supercomputers — each of them a testament to the great but unknowable life force of creativity. War and protest are what we remember the ’60s for today, but at the time it seemed like the beginning of a golden age, with moonshots and soaring modernist architecture and science enthroned in its majesty. At the 1964 New York World’s Fair, we rode the Carousel of Progress and marveled at the gifts given to society by the educated and the enlightened — and given by America to the world.</p></div></section><section id="sec-2"><header><hr/></header><div><p>And then, it all seemed to go wrong. Military failure in Vietnam, gross corruption in Washington, the oil shock and the energy crisis, epidemic drug use, an economic recession concurrent with inflation — these were crushing blows to Americans’ understanding of themselves.</p><p>On top of it all was the growing sense that the progress machine had run out of gas. Here is the first sentence of a <cite>Washington Post</cite> story from November 1978: “It is hardly a matter of doubt anymore: America’s ability to innovate just isn’t what it used to be.” And here is the headline of a different <cite>Post</cite> essay on the same subject: “Something’s Happened to Yankee Ingenuity.”</p><p>The alarm was not misplaced. US economic growth had slowed. A trade deficit had opened up; manufacturing was struggling; the Detroit automakers were clearly in trouble. But what were we to do about it? President <a href="https://jacobin.com/2024/12/jimmy-carter-obituary-neoliberalism-foreign-policy">Jimmy Carter</a> opted for the usual thing, appointing a blue-ribbon advisory committee to study America’s innovation system and find out what ailed it. It in turn produced a massive report that made only minuscule recommendations.</p><p>Others, however, spoke out with what seemed like brilliant clarity. This time around they did not blame conformity or crass, chrome-plated cars. It was Big Government, they said, that was crushing America’s creativity. Their solutions were simple and direct, and they got their way. In 1978, Congress slashed capital gains taxes on the grounds that doing so would reinvigorate the spirit of innovation. The Steiger Amendment, the measure was called: written by a Republican, passed by a Democratic Congress, and signed by a Democratic president, it was the first shot in the long and noisy tax-cut revolution that goes on to this day.</p><p>A curious detail about Ronald Reagan, the man who defeated Carter in 1980 and put the rollback of government into high gear: he was very fond of the word “creative.” <cite>The Creative Society</cite> was the title he gave to a collection of his speeches, and unleashing creativity was his polestar as he launched his market-oriented revolution. In 1988, he looked back with satisfaction on his achievements and spoke of a “new economy,” a sort of accelerated version of postindustrialism, in which capital was free to zip around the world electronically and “labor” had come to mean “the creativity of the writer of computer software.” This new economy, Reagan said, was outside the control of any kind of establishment: “It’s driven from the ground up by our new heroes, the entrepreneurs, the explorers of the modern era, who conceive, create, and produce, and in doing so discover the future one piece at a time.”</p><p>In this new understanding, creativity was identified not so much with artists or countercultural youth but with the act of entrepreneurship, the starting-up of a business. As the supply-side philosopher George Gilder put it in 1984, “The key to growth is quite simple: creative men with money. The cause of stagnation is similarly clear: depriving creative individuals of financial power.” Creative people would deliver prosperity, so long as we deferred to them and made sure their taxes were low. Gilder went on: “An economy is governed by the will and imagination, creativity and persistence of its entrepreneurs. All that matters is that they be encouraged . . . to do their work well.”</p><p>The disassembly of the old liberal state has been a decades-long project, and at every step in the demolition, these ideas were what got the job done. Creativity and innovation were, persistently and comprehensively, the cover story for the neoliberal revolution. We privatized university research — and universities themselves, in effect — on the grounds that the profit motive would reinvigorate the creativity of the highly educated. We deregulated banks because we thought “financial innovation” would make us all rich. We wrote trade agreements that undermined the livelihoods of the blue-collar class because we knew it did not innovate. We offshored manufacturing because, in a postindustrial “new economy,” only creative work was worthy of protection and respect.</p><p>A zenith of some kind was reached during the presidency of Barack Obama, who understood innovation as the paramount object of enlightened governance. In a famous speech in 2011 he acknowledged the “painful disruptions” that were tearing the middle class apart, but even so, he insisted that in an “innovation economy” the only real answer was more and better education. Obama mentioned “innovation” or “innovators” in all seven of his State of the Union speeches, he proposed an “Innovation Agenda,” he published a series of innovation manifestos, and the executive branch resonated enthusiastically to the new imperative. The State Department, for example, launched the Transatlantic Innovation Action Partnership, the US-India Innovation Exchange, the NEXUS Innovation Initiative, the Global Innovation through Science and Technology program, and the American Innovation Roadshow. The Smithsonian dubbed 2015 the “Year of Innovation.” So committed was the Defense Department to the golden idea that, in one thirty-eight-minute speech in 2016, Secretary Ashton Carter managed to use some version of the word “innovation” sixty-seven times, calling for greater creativity in every aspect of warmaking and carefully name-checking the era’s great tech CEOs.</p></div></section><section id="sec-3"><header><hr/></header><div><p>All these momentous efforts, undertaken over the decades to revive innovation and creativity . . . and yet the twin gods have never really returned. Writing and music and liberal-arts academia are career dead ends today, as everyone knows. Culturally speaking, the country is obviously stagnant, with its classic rock and its superhero movies. Politically, we are in an endless loop of the old identity politics versus backlash wars of the 1970s. We still drive cars and live in suburbs and travel on jet planes and blast our enemies with B-52s. And despite our tax cutting and our deregulating and even despite our very real advances in computers and telecommunications, productivity growth today lags well behind the pace of the ’50s and ’60s. Even in the unhappy year 1978, the economy grew at a rate of 5.5 percent, much greater than what we ordinarily achieve nowadays.</p><p>But we modern Americans <em>have</em> succeeded in discovering levels of inequality unknown to our ancestors. Today what economists call the “<a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/capital-labor-share-income-power">labor share</a>” of national income is at all-time lows, as blue-collar workers are tossed overboard from the middle class. What we might call the “creative share,” meanwhile, is at all-time highs. In 1978, there were only two known billionaires in the United States. Today there are close to a thousand, cornering this market or that one, jacking up the price of medicine, injecting millions into political campaigns, collecting art, dispensing wisdom to the eager crowds at SXSW, building their end-times fortresses, chirping about how AI might end humanity, achieving remarkable levels of spiritual enlightenment, and absorbing the praise of the world for their innovativeness, their amazing powers of creativity.</p><p>Sometimes it feels as though the old middle-class society was undone by its dreams. “Equality is the antithesis of creativity,” an education magazine instructed Americans back in 1960. But we never understood the contradiction or considered the oligarchic downside. We loved equality and yet valued creativity over almost everything else: this is what we wanted for every child, the vague but all-American form of brilliance that would give us artistic achievement and spiritual satisfaction at the same time. It was a short walk from there to the cultlike adulation we routinely express for <a href="https://jacobin.com/2014/01/in-the-name-of-love">Steve Jobs</a>, innovator and prophet, billionaire son of the old middle class.</p><p>Maybe the truth is that those creative billionaires are the only ones who really matter. “The creative person in a sense does something for all of us simply by being,” the psychologist Frank Barron declared back in the heady year 1969, “and perhaps we help ourselves when we help such persons in the process of their own creative unfolding.” Maybe their creativity trickles down to the rest of us the same way material prosperity is transmitted. Maybe building an elite that breaks things and smokes weed and cavorts around onstage with a deregulatory chainsaw is the best any nation can ask for. We gape and cheer and marvel at their enlightenment, for we know they elevate the rest of us simply by being.</p></div></section><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/frank-creativity-class-inequality-neoliberalism?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-22T15:09:44.137Z</published><summary type="text">Thomas Frank on the middle class’s most cherished idea, creativity, and how it became the cover story for the plutocracy that replaced it.</summary></entry><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/review-fielder-holmes-documentary-thriller</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/review-fielder-holmes-documentary-thriller"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/png" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/549186938422.png"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/549186938422.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/549186938422.png"/><title type="text">The Strange Power of You Can See Everything</title><updated>2026-10-22T16:30:39.436864Z</updated><author><name>Eileen Jones</name></author><category label="Film and TV" term="Film and TV"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><div><p>Nathan Fielder and Lance Oppenheim’s fascinating documentary <cite>You Can See Everything</cite> is now the object of obsession for moviegoers everywhere. It’s a pretty exciting moment, groups of friends racing off to the theater, talking avidly in the parking lot afterward, going home to think about it some more, seeking out more friends with whom to hash it out all over again. If you haven’t seen it and you’re not “in on it” yet, fix that immediately. This doesn’t happen often in our moviegoing world.</p><p>The initial source of obsession is the basic wow factor of the film, which is codirectors Fielder and Oppenheim’s assured ability to make you toggle back and forth for hours between two broad assessments of Elizabeth Holmes, the disgraced health tech CEO of Theranos, currently doing time for fraud in a minimum-security Texas prison. In constantly proclaiming her innocence, is Holmes just a cynical, manipulative liar? Or is it actually possible that she is somehow, in some complicated way, an innocent — someone who “thinks differently,” is perhaps neurodivergent, and may be held in a kind of emotional bondage by the men in her life like her current partner Billy Evans and her former boyfriend, Ramesh “Sunny” Balwani, the ex-chief operating officer of Theranos, who are the <em>real</em> baddies in the scenario?</p><p>Nobody’s questioning whether fraud was committed, at least not for long — interrogator Fielder starts off making it clear that he doesn’t believe her. Holmes’s Theranos invention was marketed on the claim that it could test a single drop of blood for a huge number of diseases and conditions with maximum efficiency, an incredible claim that was never borne out in practical tests. Yet Theranos took in vast funding dollars from a consortium of old rich guys who were particularly susceptible to Holmes’s baby-faced blonde appeal. But the longer Fielder interviews her, the more he sees her as an enigma, if only because she’s claiming such an inhuman level of transparency in offering up “my truth.” The film’s title is drawn from an offer she makes to him, via text, to come and document the lives of her and her family in the month before she goes to prison: “You can see everything.”</p><p>At a certain point in the process, Fielder even moves in with them, doubling down on Holmes’s commitment to revealing all to him. Fielder himself, in <a href="https://www.goldderby.com/film/2026/you-can-see-everything-nathan-fielder-screening-interview/">interviews</a> promoting the film, asks repeatedly the question he claims still preoccupies him: “Why would you want to spend your last month of freedom [before a decade in prison] with this guy?”</p></div><section id="sec-1"><header><h2>Why Nathan Fielder of All People?</h2></header><div><p>In other words, why would a woman invite awkward, deadpan, cringe-comedy king Nathan Fielder and his film crew to infest her home and family life? At such a terrible time, he’s hardly a comforting presence. And even the most cursory googling will reveal the sort of media figure Fielder is and the agonizing lengths he goes to in probing the most uncomfortable and often bleakly funny areas of human interaction.</p><p>If Holmes wants a documentary showing her in a warm and cuddly way that might improve her public image, perhaps even a path to a post-prison comeback, there are countless hacks in the world of documentaries who’d be happy to oblige. But consider the first filmmaker Holmes and Davis approached: Errol Morris of <cite>The Thin Blue Line</cite> (1988), <cite>Mr. Death: The Rise and Fall of Fred A. Leuchter, Jr</cite>. (1999), and <cite>The Fog of War</cite> (2003). Morris is, or once was, the <em>other</em> most uncomfortably probing media-maker, the one who came up with the “three-minute rule,” the length of time the director and his camera stare at the person being interviewed after asking a question. Morris claimed he’d determined that no one can withstand three full minutes of silent staring — it cracks the strongest — the most wary, reticent, secretive interviewee will start spilling their guts.</p><p>You see the pattern here. Though Holmes claims she had no clear idea who Nathan Fielder was, it seems clear that <em>somebody</em> did. It may be whole point of this documentary was to create the clash of the titans, to pit Holmes’s wide-eyed unbroken gaze to a documentary filmmaker who thinks he can out-stare her, break her down, get her to confess to lying, fraud, cynical manipulation. And if he can’t do it, well — that could stand as a kind of “reasonable doubt” in the public mind.</p><p>According to John Carreyrou, the journalist who broke the Theranos scandal, Holmes had previously <a href="https://www.nytimes.com/2026/10/17/business/theranos-fraud-elizabeth-holmes-documentary.html?eafs_enabled=false">hired</a> Morris in 2016 to make “sleek Theranos commercials at the height of her pre-scandal fame.” Post-scandal, she approached Morris about making the documentary. Morris was interested, and inquired if Carreyrou would be willing to participate, saying, “I see it as a ‘he said, she said,’” scenario. Carreyrou flatly rejected this characterization, saying, “That’s not how I see it. There are basic facts, and those facts show Elizabeth Holmes committed fraud.”</p><p>Again, according to Carreyrou, Morris later indicated that, though he didn’t dispute Holmes’s guilt, he “wanted to explore the theme of self-deception.”</p><p>Obviously, we’ll never know what Morris’s version would’ve looked like beyond the certainty of the epic stare down. But Fielder and Oppenheim’s film, which premiered a scant six weeks ago at the Telluride Film Festival, caused an immediate sensation. It was quickly slotted into theaters and marketed on its extraordinary preview, showing Nathan Fielder — whose flat probing stare is well known to those who’ve seen his remarkable cringe-comedy television series <cite>Nathan for You</cite> and <cite>The Rehearsal</cite> — facing off in a close-up stare down with Elizabeth Holmes, whose own big blue-eyed stare, absolutely unblinking, seemed to make it a mysterious attempt at offering up proof of her own purity and honesty. Look at how transparent those eyes are, like a newborn baby’s!</p></div></section><section id="sec-2"><header><h2>Elizabeth Holmes’s Viral Stare</h2></header><div><p>This image of Holmes’s face drawn from the film went viral. And in <cite>You Can See Everything</cite>, it becomes the main site of interrogation because, for one thing, her ability to stare at such length is physically bizarre. If you try it yourself, you quickly find how painful it is not to blink for, say, a full minute. Actors adopt the unblinking stare as an extreme performance device that is guaranteed to weird out audiences — Anthony Hopkins used it to play Hannibal Lecter in <cite>The Silence of the Lambs</cite>. The comedian Josh Jackson has a whole stand-up <a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=npl8bxpH7EM">routine</a> built around that mad, impossible, unbearable stare of Elizabeth Holmes.</p><p>Holmes poses a challenge to film’s supposed capacity to reveal what can’t be seen with the naked eye. Early film theorists, seeking to define the compelling new medium, used to expound extensively on the power of the filmed close-up of the human face to show us what no one could see in real life. Projected far beyond life-size, the close-up seems to show us every slight movement of facial muscles, every passing shift in expression. The old province of painting, “capturing the soul of the sitter” posing before the all-seeing eye of the artist, seemed to have given way to this far more revealing mechanical media form.</p><p><cite>You Can See Everything</cite> goes far beyond the intensive, mesmerizing interactions of Fielder and Holmes, continuing past the point when Holmes goes to prison and becomes almost entirely inaccessible. Her partner and the father of her children, Billy Evans, becomes the subject of filmed interrogation, in addition to one more startling figure I can’t name because it’s a spoiler. But safe to say, each of these new subjects of the documentary, who are also performers before the camera with agendas of their own, shift the ground of interrogation in such dramatic ways, audiences are exclaiming aloud, often in unison, as they’re swayed this way and that in shockingly emotional twists and turns.</p><p>Fielder and Oppenheim are not in the least shy about deploying several devices from the world of scripted filmmaking, including genre conventions drawn from gothic melodrama, suspense films, and the paranoid conspiracy thriller. For example, the tense, thrumming score by Ari Balouzian, who worked with Oppenheim on <cite>Primetime</cite>, also out this month, deliberately evokes <cite>Vertigo</cite>, a film about a man whose fantasy obsession with a woman finally drives him insane. Late in the film, “the ticking clock,” one of the tritest conventions of suspense films, becomes a driving force in keying up the audience to a fever pitch of angst.</p><p>You can recognize all these conventions as they appear and still be swept away by the power of <cite>You Can See Everything</cite>. I was so dazzled by the film that I could think of only one director, Alfred Hitchcock, who was better at making audiences fully aware of his films’ artifice while still manipulating their emotions as effectively as if they were the most naive of viewers.</p></div></section><section id="sec-3"><header><h2>Fielder and Oppenheim’s Agenda</h2></header><div><p>Which gives rise to the question — as you round into hour three of <cite>You Can See Everything</cite>, even more enthralled than you were in hour one — what are Fielder and Oppenheim trying to accomplish here? It certainly goes far beyond the question of whether Elizabeth Holmes is a lying grifter or not, though many critics and commentators seem stuck on that basic question. As she seems to draw even Fielder into a more and more emotionally addled relationship — and as you begin to wonder how much Fielder is at least partially <em>performing</em> that addled state for the purpose of further addling you, the viewer — you start the <cite>Vertigo</cite>-like spiraling into undecidability that is both deeply uncomfortable and yet hypnotically irresistible.</p><p>What is this power of persuasion that some people possess, so potent it seems to warp time and space around them? It’s a question that troubled ancient Greek and Roman rhetoricians as they grappled with the dangers of sophistry. How much are Fielder and Oppenheim seeking to both study and demonstrate it through cinematic manipulation? How much are you, the viewer, implicated in your own constant shadings of the truth and outright lies and impromptu performances in order to grease the wheels of your own difficult passage through life, surrounded by other fibbers, scammers, and playactors? If Elizabeth Holmes’s face comes to horrify you after you’ve gazed at its infantile blankness long enough, and if Nathan Fielder’s deadpan also begins to agitate you, what is your own face doing as you present it to others out in the world?</p><p>For Halloween horror viewing, look no further than <cite>You Can See Everything</cite>, a film that only grows eerier in the days after you’ve seen it, drawing viewers back to the theater to determine whether they really saw what they thought they saw. It’s truly one of a kind.</p></div></section><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/review-fielder-holmes-documentary-thriller?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-22T15:00:53.181Z</published><summary type="text">In You Can See Everything, Nathan Fielder and Lance Oppenheim turn their confrontation with Elizabeth Holmes into a Hitchcockian thriller about the slippery nature of truth. It’s a masterpiece.</summary></entry><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/weber-economics-inflation-affordability-policy</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/weber-economics-inflation-affordability-policy"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/jpeg" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/586058370752.jpg"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/586058370752.jpg" medium="image" type="image/jpeg"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/586058370752.jpg"/><title type="text">We Can Beat the Right With a Left-Wing Affordability Agenda</title><updated>2026-10-22T13:46:55.322045Z</updated><author><name>Niko Block</name></author><category label="Books" term="Books"/><category label="Economic Science" term="Economic Science"/><category label="Politics" term="Politics"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><div><p>In the past decade, much ink has been spilled over the question of whether we are witnessing a resurgence of fascism. Those debates have calmed since last November, when Donald Trump casually <a href="https://thehill.com/homenews/administration/5618106-trump-mamdani-fascist/">identified</a> himself as a fascist amid a disorientingly effusive meeting with New York City’s Mayor-elect Zohran Mamdani.</p><p>Part of the problem with the debate is that fascism can be difficult to define and identify — a point economist Isabella Weber makes at the outset of her new book, <cite><a href="https://www.penguinrandomhouse.com/books/804175/anti-fascist-economics-by-isabella-weber/">Anti-Fascist Economics</a></cite>. Unlike other major political ideologies, fascism has few defining texts, social theories, or economic platforms. However, she adds, there are “unifying themes — and an obsession with restoring the dominance of the chosen group by authoritarian and violent means is key.”</p><p>To my mind, fascist ideology is captured well enough by its original symbol, the fasces: a hatchet made of tightly bound rods and an axe head, representing the fierce unity of the nation on the one hand and its outward-facing aggression on the other. As Matt Christman once described it, “The cultural expression of fascism is a Janus face of performative sentimentality and performative cruelty.” To take the point a little further, fascism’s programmatic vagueness means that we may in fact be on better footing if we regard it as a cultural phenomenon with political aspirations. That is more or less the approach offered by Weber and by Naomi Klein and Astra Taylor in their equally insightful new book, <cite><a href="https://www.google.com/search?client=safari&amp;rls=en&amp;q=end+times+fascism&amp;ie=UTF-8&amp;oe=UTF-8">End Times Fascism</a></cite>.</p><p>Both books make a persuasive case that the contemporary swell of revanchism has resulted from rising levels of economic stress and valid anxieties across vast swathes of Global North society. When a sense of scarcity takes hold, the Right can make a compelling argument for the abandonment of solidaristic values in favor of bunkerism. That we are confronting this crisis in a moment of unprecedented levels of automation and global integration points to a profound failure of the neoliberal doctrines that have shaped the global system.</p><p>Weber’s work offers one of the most systematic critiques of those doctrines, as well as a plausible set of alternative policies. At the heart of her argument is a basic refutation of the neoliberal position that there is no viable middle ground between a totalitarian command economy and the free market. Indeed, as she notes repeatedly, neoliberals have consistently shown a preference for free-market authoritarianism over social democracy. Today, she argues, we must recognize that the latter is more viable than mainstream thought has led us to believe.</p><p>The intellectual leaders of neoliberalism — notably Friedrich Hayek and Milton Friedman — are best known for their attacks on the modern welfare state. But an equally central neoliberal dogma is that price controls are necessarily doomed to fail in private markets, so that governments must choose between comprehensive price-setting or complete laissez-faire. The standard price mechanism suggests that if prices are set too low, there will be a shortage of goods; too high, and there will be a surfeit of unsold product. One of the essential premises of modern economic thought is that the ideal market-clearing price can only be determined in fully private markets.</p><p>This second argument has conquered Northern minds almost completely for the past half-century, making it one of the most sacred cows in modern economic thought. Weber reveals that this faith is unwarranted. Simply put, it does not follow from the standard price mechanism that commodity markets should be fully private or unregulated.</p><p>The problem is not merely that private markets fall prey to monopolistic power; it is that they are prone to crises that exacerbate poverty and inequality. Supply shocks can emerge from environmental disasters, wars, and pandemics — and when this occurs, prices will spike in the affected industries, with potentially dangerous political effects. As Weber puts it, “Commodity markets are inherently volatile, and the human cost of leaving them entirely to private participants falls hardest on those least able to absorb it, while carrying the potential to destabilize whole economies and societies.”</p><p>This argument, drawing from neglected histories of successful price control policies, amounts to a significant departure from the prevailing wisdom. The option of price controls is especially vital because, she argues, mainstream economists have gravely mischaracterized the drivers of inflation: far from an excess of demand, the main problem is a form of “sellers’ inflation,” which occurs when price shocks facilitate corporate price gouging at the expense of the general public.</p><p>Her work thus points in a clear direction for anyone seeking practical strategies for economic stabilization in an era of overlapping crises. For those seeking a theoretical doctrine, the conclusions are less clear, but a search for doctrine would miss the point. Weber begins with real-world observation, rather than abstract behavioral models. Likewise, the mixed-market approach she proposes would require continuous fine-tuning and is therefore intrinsically resistant to oversimplification.</p><p>In reality, there is no one-size-fits-all policy prescription across all industries in all countries. Rather, policy must be designed through a process of careful experimentation, observation, and revision. That Weber leaves some questions open, rather than giving pat answers from outmoded theories, is precisely what makes her work so exciting. Indeed, a central challenge for contemporary socialists is to consider how her vital insights on industrial policy can fit into a broader left-wing agenda.</p></div><section id="sec-1"><header><h2>The First Anti-Fascist Economists</h2></header><div><p>For Weber, many of the Left’s twentieth-century darlings should be understood as the founders of anti-fascist economics: from the world of theory, Karl Polanyi, John Maynard Keynes, Michał Kalecki; from the world of policy, Franklin Delano Roosevelt and his pricing czar, John Kenneth Galbraith.</p><p>As she reflects on the 1930s and ’40s, the contemporary relevance of their perspective becomes clear. The Great Depression was instigated by a frenzy of speculation that ended in financial calamity; from there it spread to the international system as a result of misguided adherence to the gold standard. In Germany, the centrist chancellor, Heinrich Brüning, adopted a textbook policy of austerity, exacerbating the crises of unaffordability and unemployment while “business elites and orthodox economists cheered him on,” writes Weber.</p><p>Several important lessons emerge from this episode. For Polanyi, observing the crisis unfold from nearby Vienna, “The victory of fascism was made practically unavoidable by the liberals’ obstruction of any reform involving planning, regulation, or control.”</p><p>Second, countercyclical expansionary policies may boost employment as well as profits, but many capitalists nonetheless oppose such interventions because these threaten their <em>political</em> power. On this point, Weber draws from Kalecki’s incisive <a href="https://jacobin.com/2018/05/political-aspects-of-full-employment-kalecki-job-guarantee">argument</a> that business elites typically oppose government programs that would generate full employment and thus strengthen workers’ bargaining power. The business community therefore seeks to retain its control over “the state of confidence” in the economy and accepts the cyclical volatility this entails. Often their cause is championed in the public sphere by “prominent so-called ‘economic experts’ closely connected with banking and industry.” In this light, authoritarianism can be especially appealing to elites, as the state actively stokes industry — especially in weapons production — yet at the same time keeps wages down by force.</p><p>Third, the Left can also contribute to crisis when it puts doctrine ahead of observation. On this point, Weber observes that the German Social Democrats sustained an ideological commitment to the gold standard because their dominant in-house economist, Rudolf Hilferding, <a href="https://brill.com/view/journals/hima/33/2/article-p134_5.xml">believed</a> it vindicated the Marxian labor theory of value.</p><p>Fourth, economists’ promises that short-term suffering is necessary for long-run stabilization should be dismissed as millenarian superstition. As Keynes put it, “In the long run we are all dead.” Indeed, he added, “Economists set themselves too easy, too useless a task if in tempestuous seasons they can only tell us that when the storm is long past the ocean is flat again.” Short-term crises — such as Germany’s 1923 hyperinflation or its 1931 fiscal and banking crisis — can have irreversible consequences when we account for human behavior in the real world. Even brief periods of deprivation can give rise to a political logic of sadistic authoritarianism that soon takes on a life of its own.</p></div></section><section id="sec-2"><header><h2>Rethinking Inflation</h2></header><div><p>The present moment is more of a rhyme with, rather than a repetition of, the 1930s. But it is hard to ignore the parallel behaviors of a political establishment that lacks courage, ignores evidence, and disingenuously takes advice from business elites.</p><p>In some ways, the waves of crises have been slower moving, but there are more of them, and they will persist for a long while. The 2008 financial crisis spread from Wall Street throughout the global economy, and this time was approached with some degree of countercyclical stabilization — but that was followed by austerity. Consequently, inequality surged across many Northern economies, affordability declined in many areas, and a new wave of political bigotry arose to critique the Brüning-esque centrists who claimed there was no other option.</p><p>The pandemic and subsequent war in Ukraine brought a whole new round of crisis: a wave of inflation that hit several economies at once. In response, economists working from textbook theories of inflation called for a new round of austerity. Those theories, the Phillips curve and the “non-accelerating inflation rate of unemployment” (or NAIRU), insist that when employment rates are too high, spendthrift workers will push prices up to a self-defeating extent. Hence the appropriate solution, they claim, is to raise unemployment through fiscal austerity and monetary tightening (i.e., high interest rates).</p><p>As Weber notes, the evidence for these ideas is <a href="https://pubs.aeaweb.org/doi/10.1257/jep.11.1.93">weak</a>. Despite multiple attempts, economists have never actually identified the NAIRU; it is something “like a unicorn, a recurring reference in the literature but never observed in real life.”</p><p>The underlying problem, she wrote in a series of <a href="https://doi.org/10.4337/roke.2023.02.05">papers</a> and <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/business/commentisfree/2021/dec/29/inflation-price-controls-time-we-use-it">op-eds</a> during the inflationary episode, was not excess demand but sellers’ inflation. Her central argument is that when supply shocks occur in “systemically significant” sectors like oil, they can cause uneven ripple effects across the rest of the market. Because oil is an input in countless other goods, many producers passed on the price shock by raising their sale prices — an echo of the 1970s inflation wave that followed from the Organization of the Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC) oil embargo. In these moments when businesses concurrently boost prices, a secondary logic can take hold. In concentrated markets, the price signal allows sellers to effectively collude by hiking prices in tandem, “without anything so direct as a ‘conversation.’” This allows them to overcompensate for their losses and secure windfall profits at the expense of the broader public. (That this is a real and deliberate phenomenon is clear; <a href="https://doi.org/10.1016/j.strueco.2025.04.005">one</a> of Weber’s many papers surveys transcripts from 138,962 corporate earnings calls and finds that top managers tend to speak positively about inflation because it enables profit-enhancing price hikes.)</p><p>The distributional effects of sellers’ inflation have been especially pernicious, because it hit essential goods harder than luxury goods. This occurred partly because the market is highly concentrated in certain essential sectors — especially <a href="https://doi.org/10.1080/09538259.2026.2706002">food</a> but also <a href="https://peri.umass.edu/wp-content/uploads/joomla/images/publication/WP571.pdf">household staples</a> like diapers — and partly because of the inelastic nature of essentials; you can’t do without them.</p><p>In this context, monetary tightening does more harm than good, by elevating unemployment as well as debt servicing costs. It also disrespects precarious individuals in ways that stoke a politics of resentment. Consider, writes Weber, what it must be like to be laid off in this context and then see someone like Larry Summers on TV “saying that people like you should lose their jobs so that prices would come back down. The natural response is rage.” The far right, she adds, has cannily exploited that rage: “They have tapped into it, fueled it, and abused it with false promises.”</p><p>For many reasons, then, sellers’ inflation calls for a completely different set of policy responses. The first is a steep tax on windfall profits to disincentivize collusive price gouging. (Something like this, Weber notes, was vaguely floated by Kamala Harris early in her campaign and then meekly <a href="https://jacobin.com/2024/11/kamala-harris-election-billionaires-cuban">buried</a>.)</p><p>Second, because fossil fuels are the most systemically significant commodities, the transition to renewable energy is easily among the most important stabilization strategies. Here she cites Brett Christophers’s important <a href="https://www.versobooks.com/en-ca/products/3069-the-price-is-wrong">point</a> that a green transition cannot be expected to occur just because the price of renewable energy has declined below that of fossil fuels. Renewables are fundamentally different in that they are “a stock of capital goods” and “not a flow of inputs.” They do not yield short-term profits, and indeed they are financially riskier, especially in moments of monetary tightening. Private capital therefore cannot be expected to build the renewable infrastructure we need. In this context, even carbon pricing policies (like cap-and-trade or carbon taxes) are bound to fail. Absent renewable infrastructure, these costs are simply passed on to frustrated consumers.</p><p>Third, Weber calls for active government policies that would “steer, manage or provision essentials.” On the provisioning side, she defends a revitalization of public education, transportation, and health care under a framework of “universal basic services.” However, it is on the steering and management side that Weber makes her central intervention.</p><p>Her flagship policy proposal is the use of buffer stocks to smooth out supply shocks when they occur. Contrary to the neoliberal story, Weber’s work reveals that the state can in fact regulate prices by creating substantial reserves of nonperishable goods — especially food and fossil fuels — by buying en masse when they are cheap and selling when prices rise. While the production of these goods can fluctuate, demand for them remains relatively stable and predictable because of their essential nature. Price controls can therefore be entirely viable if they are implemented through supply management, rather than mere fiat. In the present book, an exemplary case study is the FDR-Galbraith administration during World War II, which sustained effective price controls despite limited institutional experience with them.</p><p>Weber also highlights China’s much deeper history of price management, which was the central focus of her dissertation and <a href="https://www.routledge.com/How-China-Escaped-Shock-Therapy-The-Market-Reform-Debate/Weber/p/book/9781032008493">first book</a>, <cite>How China Escaped Shock Therapy</cite>. She shows that Chinese governments have been engaged in price controls for centuries, and a major factor in the Communist Party’s victory in the 1940s was its success in taming inflation through supply management in the areas that it captured.</p><p>In the post–Mao Zedong era, China maintained economic sovereignty in ways that many other countries did not and invited policy proposals from a community of economists who were practically minded, empirically informed, and arguably more intellectually diverse than their counterparts in the West. The resulting compromises delivered a policy approach of “crossing the river by feeling for stones.” For instance, the state experimented with price liberalization in areas where the party wanted fast growth and reined it in when inflation started to surge — a policy machinery that would respond proactively to volatility.</p><p>Returning to the present decade, Weber discusses the pandemic response in Mexico, which “offers perhaps the most impressive recent example of a creative and ambitious inflation policy.” Under Andrés Manuel López Obrador (AMLO), the government constrained prices on an essential basket of goods (including corn, beans, and rice) with partnering grocers, who in turn were rewarded with reduced transport fees and relaxed regulatory requirements. At the same time, AMLO’s government stoked domestic production through a program that allowed small farmers to sell to the government reserves at a guaranteed minimum price.</p><p>The success of these policies carries an important lesson: It is better to be prepared, because buffer stocks cannot be magically conjured when a crisis strikes; yet at the same time, active management of price and supply can be achieved on relatively short notice. In either case, the implementation of these progressive policies can offer major gains for politicians who are courageous enough to put government capacity to work in defiance of corporate elites.</p></div></section><section id="sec-3"><header><h2>Price Controls and the Broader Vision</h2></header><div><p>Over many decades, mainstream economists have constructed an edifice in which progressive ideas can hardly be uttered. Yet the arguments behind this stifling decorum are weak, as many hard-nosed progressives have demonstrated. Keynes and his followers have <a href="https://www.versobooks.com/en-ca/products/396-the-production-of-money">disproven</a> the assumption that the savings of the rich are a precondition for growth-inducing investment. Similarly, contemporary economists like Joseph Stiglitz have <a href="https://global.oup.com/academic/product/the-origins-of-inequality-and-policies-to-contain-it-9780198799597?cc=ca&amp;lang=en&amp;">shown</a> that redistribution does not stymie growth, as neoliberals claim. Weber’s demonstration that price controls are not only viable but wise should be regarded as yet another embarrassment for the masters of the house. These and other <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/08/galbraith-mainstream-economics-inflation-trade">failures</a> of mainstream economics should signal to those of us who believe in economic justice that it is time to exit the castle, to a place where we can speak more freely.</p><p>But where exactly would we go? That question is not fully answered by Weber, but she gives a sense of direction; readers of <cite>Anti-Fascist Economics</cite> who seek either an overarching theoretical critique of capitalism or a detailed policy agenda will not find everything they’re looking for. Weber is explicit that what she offers “are not blueprints but starting points.” There is no detailed master plan for a revitalization of the welfare state, or concrete engagement with broader issues of taxes and transfers. Thorough analyses and ambitious reforms on this topic have, in any case, already been advanced by <a href="https://www.hup.harvard.edu/books/9780674273559">Thomas Piketty</a> and his <a href="https://wwnorton.com/books/the-triumph-of-injustice">colleagues</a>, and these proposals — especially the effective income ceiling — are complementary to Weber’s vision.</p><p>Still, <cite>Anti-Fascist Economics</cite> could have benefited from broader engagement with the core topic of inflation. It gives a strong analysis of commodity inflation, but it misses two other types of inflation: hyperinflation and housing inflation.</p><p>Hyperinflation is relevant to Weber’s argument mostly because mainstream economists like to cite a few catastrophic episodes when the rate of inflation reached millions of percent — Germany in 1923, Hungary in 1946, or Zimbabwe in 2008 — as evidence of the necessity of monetary discipline. In fact, hyperinflation is <a href="https://doi.org/10.1093/cje/beae009">qualitatively different</a> from the more frequent dynamic of sellers’ inflation and usually occurs when an industrially fragile, import-dependent country runs out of foreign currency and cannot meet its foreign-denominated obligations. Governments facing such a crisis have occasionally chosen to break the rules of central banking by issuing new monetary assets without any expectation of repayment — and this is where true money printing can occur. When inflation sets in, residents are prone to sell their domestic currency in favor of a more stable foreign currency. This in turn devalues the domestic currency on foreign markets, so that imports become more expensive. At this point, the economy can easily slide into an “inflation-depreciation spiral” that is difficult to escape.</p><p>Weber gestures to this distinct dynamic by noting that the German hyperinflation was “not triggered by sectoral cost shocks but by the inability of the government to pay back [its] enormous debts.” If she had extended the point a little further, she could have demonstrated that hyperinflation is a rare event, and one that does not threaten countries in the Global North that borrow in their own currency and can safely finance their imports. The issue, then, is that Weber misses an opportunity to discredit conservative arguments that use the threat of hyperinflation as a cudgel to defend fiscal and monetary austerity.</p><p>The bigger lacuna is Weber’s light treatment of housing, which sits uncomfortably in her basket of essentials. It does not fit into her agenda of public provisioning quite as snugly as health care and education. At the same time, it is not the sort of good that lends itself to buffer stocks, like food and fuel.</p><p>In the Global North, housing now follows an asset logic rather than a commodity logic, which means that the standard price mechanism at the heart of Weber’s analysis does not really apply. This is evident in studies showing that in the <a href="https://doi.org/10.1080/10511482.2024.2334011">United States</a>, <a href="https://housingevidence.ac.uk/project/tackling-the-uk-housing-crisis-is-supply-the-answer/">Britain</a>, and <a href="https://www.policyalternatives.ca/news-research/the-numbers-dont-lie-the-housing-crisis-is-not-caused-by-a-supply-shortage/">Canada</a>, the stock of housing has in fact risen relative to population at the same time as it has become more unaffordable. Moreover, episodes of housing inflation become especially intense when interest rates are low — a scenario that complicates the critique of monetary tightening.</p><p>We therefore require housing-specific policies that are qualitatively distinct from the buffer stock idea. To be clear, this does not represent a fatal flaw in Weber’s argument, and she does briefly address the problem by acknowledging the financialization of housing and calling for rent controls. My point, rather, is that we have yet to work out a holistic approach to inflation that covers both commodities and assets.</p><p>Though Weber does not address every aspect of affordability, these gaps also have an inviting character, because it is clear that she wants <cite>Anti-Fascist Economics</cite> to contribute to a broader movement for economic justice. She and the many researchers with whom she collaborates have been uniquely effective in presenting their work to general audiences, promoting a broader understanding of macroeconomics while exposing neoliberal shibboleths. Certainly, her work helps to build the lines of communication between economics and the other social sciences — something that is sorely needed. Progressive political scientists have a habit of concluding their papers by blaming economic dynamics for the ills of the world, while progressive economists do the same but blame the government. Weber is one of very few left-wing economists who engages with the system as a whole and refuses to shrug off the work.</p></div></section><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/weber-economics-inflation-affordability-policy?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-22T13:46:55.322045Z</published><summary type="text">In her new book, economist Isabella Weber explains how inflation has helped drive the far right’s ascendance around the developed world — and how effective price regulation can promote affordability and boost the Left.</summary></entry><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/peter-thomas-gramsci-hegemony-intellectuals</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/peter-thomas-gramsci-hegemony-intellectuals"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/png" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/202485205935.png"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/202485205935.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/202485205935.png"/><title type="text">Peter Thomas Was a Marxist Intellectual With a Mission</title><updated>2026-10-22T12:52:03.632536Z</updated><author><name>Max Tomba</name></author><category label="Politics" term="Politics"/><category label="Theory" term="Theory"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><p>It is difficult to write in memory of Peter Thomas. Not for lack of memories, but because there are too many. So many discussions come to mind, shared projects, collective volumes to which we both contributed. One obvious one is <cite><a href="https://brill.com/display/title/17453?language=en&amp;srsltid=AU7gw4WBx-3k_k0aXQiK4IA8MX6NDPkOoGXrI-jW1zRrnPkXKI8KB0So">In Marx’s Laboratory: Critical Interpretations of the Grundrisse</a></cite> (2013), which Peter coedited with Riccardo Bellofiore and Guido Starosta. But my thoughts turn even more insistently to <cite><a href="https://www.historicalmaterialism.org/book-series/the-government-of-time-theories-of-plural-temporality-in-the-marxist-tradition/">The Government of Time: Theories of Plural Temporality in the Marxist Tradition</a></cite> (2017), coedited by Peter and Vittorio Morfino. The preparation of that volume was accompanied by countless discussions and meetings. I remember one in Milan, intellectually lively, friendly, and full of good humor. In those discussions, Peter had a remarkable ability to defuse tensions and soften the occasional sharp edges of disagreement without compromising the intellectual or political rigor of the exchange. He did so naturally, with a joke and a smile.</p><p>But now other memories come flooding back. Peter, his family, his wife Sara, and their little girls. After I moved to California, it became more difficult for us to see each other and keep in touch. Yet only recently we had been in contact again, exchanging ideas and making plans for new projects. I had invited Peter to participate in a panel on my latest book, next month, at the Historical Materialism conference in London. He had gladly accepted and had already begun making plans for a dinner at his home. I still find it difficult to believe that I will not see him in London. I canceled the panel. It makes no sense to sit around discussing my book without Peter.</p><p>A few months ago, I had also asked Peter to write a review essay for <cite>Political Theory</cite>, surveying the major publications and interpretive currents in Marx scholarship over the past twenty years. Peter had agreed, asking only for a little more time because he was overwhelmed with academic commitments. For five years, if I remember correctly, he had been serving as head of department in Brunel’s Department of Social and Political Sciences.</p><p>I can’t help thinking: damn academic administration. Increasingly, it has become a machine that devours academics’ time, giving them in return stress, conflicts of every imaginable kind, and personality clashes that multiply in direct proportion to the loss of any intellectual meaning in academic work. Peter wanted to do research. He wanted to go on learning. He was a Gramscian who wanted to build a Marxist cultural hegemony. For him, Historical Materialism was precisely such a laboratory. That is why its growth mattered so much to him. It was not, and is not, simply a matter of numbers. It is about establishing and asserting a presence, developing a network of intellectual and political relationships. Peter once told me this himself.</p><p>Peter believed in the political mission of the intellectual. At the heart of his intellectual project was a sustained effort to rethink the Gramscian concept of hegemony. Already in <cite>The Gramscian Moment</cite> (2009), Peter reconstructed hegemony as a central concept of Marxist political theory, inseparable from the formation of collective political capacities and the struggle for emancipation. His last book, <cite>Radical Politics: On the Causes of Contemporary Emancipation</cite> (2023), further developed this project, offering a powerful rethinking of politics beyond the alternatives of technocratic governance and populism.</p><p>Hegemony, in this perspective, is not simply a form of domination secured through consent but a way of doing politics through which subordinated groups develop their capacities for collective action and self-government. It is a pedagogical practice, but not in the sense of intellectuals educating passive masses. After all, who educates the educators? Rather, political actors learn through collective experimentation, confrontation, organization, and the transformation of their own practices. This conception does not reject political leadership in the abstract. Rather, it understands leadership not as a power possessed by an individual or organization but as a relationship constituted and continually transformed through collective political activity. Leadership itself is transformed as that activity develops.</p><p>“Protests without political direction are expressions of anger bordering on nihilism. Political leadership without the masses is empty vanguardist voluntarism. Intellectual work without concrete ties to politics and the anger of the masses is academic onanism.” This is how, many years ago, in a conversation with Peter in Padua, I summed up the agenda for the work that lay ahead. We never had the opportunity to return to that agenda, and I do not know how Peter might have reformulated it in light of the present.</p><p>Looking back, however, I realize how much of this understanding of hegemony was already present in Peter’s own intellectual and political activity. His commitment to Historical Materialism, his efforts to bring together scholars from different countries and traditions, his generosity toward comrades: these were not simply expressions of an admirable personality. They were also part of a particular way of understanding intellectual work as political practice.</p><p>I remember what struck me when I first met Peter. It was 2004 or 2005. Peter began telling me about his life in Naples, his research on Antonio Gramsci, and his connections with Neapolitan intellectuals and comrades. At the time, Peter, like so many of us, was a young scholar in a precarious position, moving around Europe. I was a few years older and had just secured a research position in Padua. Peter was traveling the length and breadth of Italy, seeking to build and consolidate a network of intellectual and political relationships. He was not simply going around meeting people. He was engaged in an intellectual and political project. Yet there was nothing instrumental about what he did. Quite the contrary: Peter did not ask for favors. He invited others to take part in a larger intellectual and political project. We discussed his approach to building such a project at length. I understood his point of view, but at the time I found it too ecumenical. Having been schooled in Amadeo Bordiga’s tradition, I believed we needed to be more selective. Better a few people, but the right ones.</p><p>Peter helped me and other young Italian scholars break out of our provincial intellectual confines. In 2004, he encouraged me to participate in the Historical Materialism conference in London. My intellectual formation, shaped in Italy and Germany, had decidedly neglected the English language. To put it bluntly, my English was terrible. I told Peter as much. He smiled and replied, “Who gives a shit?” If this Australian <em>cafone</em> could speak Italian, he said, then surely you, Max, could speak English. I let myself be persuaded and went to London to present a paper on Walter Benjamin and violence. It was November 2005.</p><p>With Peter’s help, I encouraged other Italian comrades to participate in Historical Materialism. For several years, a group of young researchers from Padua became regulars at the conference. Some of our publications were translated into English and published by Brill. Peter and Sara translated my book on Karl Marx and the layers of time, which they persuaded me to title <cite>Marx’s Temporalities</cite>. I was not the only one to publish with Brill. I remember Luca Basso, Vittorio Morfino, and Riccardo Bellofiore. Others deserve to be mentioned as well. What matters is that Peter helped us move beyond our provincial horizons, reach a wider audience, and make ourselves understood by anglophone readers. If that last task has not always been accomplished, the fault certainly does not lie with Peter.</p><p>He helped us become part of a larger conversation, part of a larger network, and part of a hegemonic project.</p><p>Did we succeed? Did we fail? These are the wrong questions, and there can be no right answers to the wrong questions. Hegemony, as Peter understood it, was not an achievement to be measured once and for all, but an ongoing practice of collective intellectual and political work. For those of us who had the good fortune to know Peter, to work with him, and to call him a comrade, keeping his memory alive means keeping that political project in motion. And, for those who can, it also means being there for his family.</p><p>If I am now writing these lines from Santa Cruz, where I hold a position at the University of California, Peter played a part in making that possible. He encouraged me to venture into the anglophone world. He helped me break free from the provincialism of the Padua jargon, whose very essence he had grasped and loved to make fun of.</p><p>That irony of his, and his generosity of spirit. How much I miss it, and how much I will go on missing it.</p><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/peter-thomas-gramsci-hegemony-intellectuals?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-22T12:45:47.41Z</published><summary type="text">Peter Thomas, the Marxist theorist best known for his work on Antonio Gramsci, has died. He restored the political edge to Gramsci’s theory of hegemony and saw his own scholarship as part of the Left’s fight for power.</summary></entry><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/fielder-holmes-documentary-theranos-tech</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/fielder-holmes-documentary-theranos-tech"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/jpeg" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/891776280784.jpg"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/891776280784.jpg" medium="image" type="image/jpeg"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/891776280784.jpg"/><title type="text">Nathan Fielder Enters Silicon Valley’s Vortex of Delusion</title><updated>2026-10-21T19:42:32.182225Z</updated><author><name>Jeff Fuller</name></author><category label="Film and TV" term="Film and TV"/><category label="Rich People" term="Rich People"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><div><p>W hen the credits began to roll at the screening I attended of <cite>You Can See Everything</cite>, Nathan Fielder and Lance Oppenheim’s buzzy new documentary, it was like waking up from a dream. I walked away from those three hours — which felt like quite a bit less, despite the long sequences free of dialogue — with my opinion of Elizabeth Holmes unchanged: namely, that she is guilty of everything for which she is currently serving a prison sentence and a great deal more besides, the least of which is her consistently unnerving affect. That said, for those three hours, it was a great deal of fun imagining, along with Fielder and Oppenheim, that there might be something else, something <em>more</em> to her.</p><p>Holmes and her partner, Billy Evans, present the project as an act of “radical transparency,” though anyone familiar with her case is likely to immediately read this as reputation laundering. It turns out, though, that she’s in safe hands with Fielder and Oppenheim. Their interrogation of the facts of her case is minimal.</p><p>Anyone wishing for a “gotcha” moment in which Holmes is forced to confront the enormity of her deceptions will leave <cite>You Can See Everything</cite> disappointed. Not only does she double down on the capabilities of Theranos’s technology, but she goes even further, claiming that she has never lied — not just about Theranos but <em>in her entire life</em>. The best Fielder can get from her is that it is possible that she might in the past have told a white lie on the order of untruthfully claiming to be feeling unwell to get out of attending an acquaintance’s party. But she “can’t remember” a single instance.</p><p>For a thorough accounting of her bigger lies — of which, naturally, she also has no recollection — one can consult investigative reporting, John Carreyrou’s <cite>Bad Blood</cite>, court transcripts, <a href="https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/the-dropout/id1449500734">a podcast</a>, or a streaming <a href="https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/The_Dropout">miniseries</a> adapted from that podcast (and thus lightly fictionalized). What audiences will get from <cite>You Can See Everything</cite> will not add much of substance to that story.</p><p>Rather, the movie will tell a more self-contained tale in which Fielder interrogates what it is that he sees in those weeks before Holmes’s incarceration. Initially guarded and skeptical, Fielder gradually seems to undergo something resembling Freudian transference. He subjects Elizabeth Holmes to his particular, somewhat paranoiac method of close reading, which — those familiar with his shows <cite>Nathan for You</cite> and <cite>The Rehearsal</cite> will not be surprised to learn — involves meticulous reenactments in which he invests the smallest of details (a gesture, a word) with outsize significance.</p><p>He arguably begins to mirror Holmes herself in this respect: there is a curious resonance between the two, and I find it as suspicious in the former as I do the latter. That is, if Holmes seems to put on an utterly unconvincing babe-in-the-woods act in the face of all of the forces arrayed against her, Fielder, in going so far out of his way to give Holmes the benefit of the doubt, displays — or performs — an almost total credulity that, while it certainly serves a narrative purpose, lacks verisimilitude. Simply put, it is hard to believe that he believes her, however much it adds to the complexity and interest of the film to — for a time — suspend that disbelief.</p><p>Exhibit A is the sequence in which Fielder shows Holmes the famous Abbott and Costello routine “Who’s on First?” Holmes appears not to understand the basic situation underlying the frenetic dialogue: that there is a baseball player named “Who.” While she feigns amusement, she is unable to explain why. Evans seizes upon this supposed lack of understanding in order to claim that Holmes just understands the world differently than the rest of us. This is highly tendentious, of course: what an ordinary (maybe even neurotypical?) person — say, the sort of normie who might be called to serve on a jury — understands as “lying” could look quite different to the masters of the universe.</p></div><section id="sec-1"><header><h2>Art House Methods for the Megaplex</h2></header><div><p>In any case, <cite>You Can See Everything</cite> is a terrifically entertaining entry in the canon of documentary filmmaking for the age of the uncertainty principle, in which the film knows, and is at a basic level interested in, the fact that the act of observation is an act <em>upon</em> the object of observation. One is seeing people who are constantly, acutely aware that they are being seen, and they try their best to be seen a certain way. This calls the documentary genre into question, and radically so — which is no innovation on Fielder and Oppenheim’s part, but it is notable that they managed to pull it out of art house cinema and onto commercial screens, and that it is currently causing about as much ink to flow as any recent blockbuster has.</p><p>Given the directors’ previous work — Oppenheim’s <cite>Some Kind of Heaven</cite> (2020), <cite>Ren Faire</cite> (2024), and <cite>Primetime</cite> (2026), and Fielder’s television projects <cite>Nathan for You</cite> (2013–18), <cite>The Rehearsal</cite> (2022–present), and <cite>The Curse</cite> (2023–24), his collaboration with Benny Safdie — it is unsurprising that the film resists an explicit political interpretation.</p><p>But the portrayal of the Holmes–Evans couple is an almost caricatural embodiment of the milieu out of which they emerged, one whose influence over our debased present is difficult to overstate. Consider the evolving representation of Evans, an MIT graduate who in the beginning of the film seems a culturally liberal sort, conversant in therapy/wellness speak — it’s he who utters the words “radical transparency.” This stretch of <cite>You Can See Everything</cite> was filmed, appropriately, in coastal Southern California, where the couple spends the majority of their time together before Holmes departs to serve her sentence. Even there on the beach, however, Evans’s performances of empathy are often comically inept, a violent rage just barely concealed beneath an “I hear what you’re saying. . . . ” Another tense moment sees Billy somewhat forcefully wrest a bowl of cracked eggs from Elizabeth, who is presumably beating them too gently. Is Billy in fact a controlling partner? And wouldn’t that be a little convenient, particularly given that Holmes’s defense of her own conduct relies in part on being prey to another controlling man: Ramesh “Sunny” Balwani, her former lover and chief operating officer of Theranos?</p><p>Just before Holmes’s prison sentence begins and midway through the film, the family relocates from California to Texas to be near the minimum-security facility where she’ll be incarcerated. Evans is now in Austin. As has been known to happen for other tech entrepreneurs making the move from California to Texas, his physical displacement is accompanied by an explicit embrace of hypermasculinity and extremely online right-wing politics. His Austin home decor is minimal, though there are a number of pet reptiles crawling about, and a framed motivational poster of Winston Churchill adorns the wall above his desk. The Billy of the latter half of <cite>You Can See Everything</cite> is suddenly a gun-toting Charlie Kirk admirer with “vengeance in [his] heart.” He would also like for you to know that he’s a very talented lover — a boast that’s less surprising after an earlier shot in which Billy has seemingly invited the camera for a close-up of his penis.</p><p>In the late sequences, Billy’s aggression is on full display, as when he berates Amanda Seyfried, as much on the late Kirk’s behalf as on Holmes’s. Or when he attempts to shut down Fielder’s line of questioning with one of his and Holmes’s collaborators, who is in the process of acknowledging, if only by implication, that the original version of the Theranos blood-testing device did not in fact work.</p></div></section><section id="sec-2"><header><h2>The Hubris of the Wannabe Tech Overlords</h2></header><div><p>That the film exists at all is itself a monument to the hubris of Holmes, whose adoption of the tech industry’s modus operandi of empty mythology as marketing allowed her to get as far as she did. It must have been as stupefying as it was exhilarating the first go-round. Why wouldn’t she think it could work once more? Alas, pathological liars who never completed their Stanford degrees seem to be about a <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/04/altman-chatgpt-artificial-intelligence-regulations">dime</a> a <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/06/musk-trillionaire-inequality-liberalism-socialism">dozen</a>.</p><p>Regarding Elizabeth Holmes, insofar as you can see everything, it’s because there’s not a whole lot there. But Fielder and Oppenheim’s considerable achievement lies in their ability to elevate such material into a genuinely compelling work of art. Go see it with someone; you’ll be talking about it for days.</p></div></section><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/fielder-holmes-documentary-theranos-tech?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-21T19:37:05.509Z</published><summary type="text">In You Can See Everything, Nathan Fielder appears almost willing to believe Elizabeth Holmes’s increasingly implausible claims of innocence. Whether or not his credulity is genuine, the result is a fascinating study of Silicon Valley self-deception.</summary></entry><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/egypt-middle-ages-famine-class</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/egypt-middle-ages-famine-class"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/jpeg" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/903894781316.jpg"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/903894781316.jpg" medium="image" type="image/jpeg"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/903894781316.jpg"/><title type="text">Medieval Egypt Was No Stranger to Class War</title><updated>2026-10-21T18:36:58.209558Z</updated><author><name>Nicholas Liu</name></author><category label="History" term="History"/><category label="Inequality" term="Inequality"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><div><p>On Roda Island in the Nile stands a stone column nineteen cubits (thirty-four feet) tall and nearly 1,200 years old. It is called <a href="https://whc.unesco.org/en/tentativelists/1826/">the Nilometer</a>. Before the construction of the Aswan Dam, an official would measure how high the river rose and from that reading determine the fate of the country’s annual harvest. By the eleventh century and continuing until the Ottoman Turkish conquest of 1517, the rulers of Egypt had made a tradition of <a href="https://www.iis.ac.uk/multimedia/fatimid-feasts-and-festivals/">exorbitant pageantry</a> whenever the waterline reached sixteen cubits: the harvest would be reaped, the cosmic and communal order confirmed, the people fed and placated, and the land tax collected.</p><p>But not all Nilometer news was good news. If, by around the end of August, the water still had not reached sixteen cubits, the festivities and the land tax would be canceled, and the people would know that hard times lay ahead. Conversely, a continued rise to eighteen or nineteen cubits would mean the Nile was flooding and could take thousands of homes and people with it.</p><p>Some believed that such disasters were cosmic warnings against society’s sins, and that the ruling class — military cliques, government officials, and private landowners — was to blame for those sins. But God’s punishment did not fall only on the guilty. “Fear a trial which will not strike those who have wronged among you exclusively,” reads <a href="https://quran.com/al-anfal/25/translations/en-sahih-international">a verse</a> in Al-Anfal, the eighth chapter of the Qur’an. Tyranny and corruption (<em>fasad</em>) were seen as a rot that spread through the entire communal order, as with the People of Lot before their destruction. Divine wrath was an elemental force, not a paper writ delivered to particular individuals. Popular protest was different, as the ruling classes were sometimes reminded. It could be just as sudden, furious, and overwhelming, but it was precise in its targets, and its moral and religious justification was plain to all.</p><p>The wealthiest members of society often profited most during these periods of heightened suffering. Merchants and nobles would <a href="https://scholarlypublications.universiteitleiden.nl/access/item%3A2728773/view">hoard grain</a> even in good times to anticipate a future shortage, but most forms of state discipline targeted only bakers and millers of the lower middle class, or what medievalists often call the “<a href="https://books.openedition.org/psorbonne/144889?lang=en">conjunctural poor</a>” — those who fluctuated between subsistence and poverty as economic conditions shifted. Al-Musabbihi, a chronicler and official under the Fatimid dynasty (969–1171), lived through the famine of 1024–25 and wrote of grain shipments diverted to the palace, the sight of bodies buried without ritual washing or shrouds, and starving people reduced to eating grass.</p><p>The threat of popular violence put the palace on edge. On January 16, 1025, the caliph, making a procession through Cairo, was confronted by shouting: “Hunger, oh Commander of the Faithful, hunger! Neither your father nor your grandfather did such a thing to us.” Hunger spread from the civilian population to the <a href="https://hal.science/hal-02945046/file/Zouache_Blacks_in_the_Fatimid_Army_OK.pdf">black infantry</a> of the caliph’s army, a corps composed of Sudanese slave soldiers. Soon both were rummaging for grain wherever they could find it, including in government warehouses opened by sympathetic or terrified officials.</p><p>That famine set a pattern that would hold for more than five hundred years. When the river failed, the people who controlled the grain found ways to profit, and the people who went hungry found ways to make them pay, or at least fear.</p></div><section id="sec-1"><header><h2>Not Merely Acts of God</h2></header><div><p>The Fatimid regime was dismantled in 1171 by the Kurdish warlord Saladin, whose Ayyubid dynasty was in turn overthrown in 1250 by its own Mamluks — Turkic and Circassian slave soldiers who subsequently established a <a href="https://brill.com/view/journals/jesh/56/2/article-p189_2.xml?language=en&amp;srsltid=AU7gw4UFTkQNevProEUsWrL4vmKkRXJAIdGkyFTKj1lrtYMq8skcMhYl">military-patronage state</a> that controlled Egypt, Palestine, and Syria until 1517. Despite the perennial hum of coups and infighting around the sultan’s throne, 250 years of relative administrative continuity lent the regime enough time and resources to build <a href="https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mamluk_architecture">towering institutions</a> of religious welfare and political legitimacy, patronize a literary renaissance, and organize Egypt as the focal point of Mediterranean and Indian Ocean commerce.</p><p>Nevertheless, the limited safety net and trade money were parts of a system far more extractive than the Fatimid state had ever been. Mamluk captains, trying to control a potentially restive population and needing money to keep buying new Mamluks from the slave markets of Crimea, <a href="https://blaydes.people.stanford.edu/sites/g/files/sbiybj24621/files/media/file/land1.pdf">parceled out</a> <em>iqta</em> (revenue assignments) among themselves and hoarded supplies to an unprecedented degree. The traditional lines between military and civilian roles blurred as some captains in turn leased their <em>iqtas</em> to non-Mamluk administrators, while they themselves lobbied the sultan for lucrative administrative positions, like that of <em>muhtasib</em>, the office responsible for policing the markets. Compounding disasters then made a bad situation far worse: the black death of the mid-fourteenth century wiped out the rural workforce, dikes and canals silted up (which meant the Nile had to rise higher for a sufficient harvest), and <a href="https://pure.manchester.ac.uk/ws/portalfiles/portal/282940395/Christ_Economic_Decline.pdf">the effects</a> of the Little Ice Age made the river itself far more erratic.</p><p>Matters came to a head in 1403 during the rule of the teenage Sultan Faraj ibn Barquq, when the Nile once again failed to rise just after the Turco-Mongol warlord Timur had ravaged Mamluk Syria and another wave of the black death approached. Mamluk <em>amirs</em>, or commanders, responded by fighting each other and squeezing their tenants even harder to keep their own ledgers balanced. Faraj and his government, unable to materially solve any problems or admit to their own failures, resorted to massive <a href="https://www.thehouseofislam.com/prayers/istisqa">public prayers</a> for rain and crackdowns on supposed expressions of moral decay like alcohol, prostitution, and religious minorities who flouted sumptuary laws. Adam Sabra <a href="https://catdir.loc.gov/catdir/samples/cam031/00023607.pdf">writes</a> in <cite>Poverty and Charity in Medieval Islam: Mamluk Egypt, 1250–1517</cite> that during the 1403–4 crisis, chroniclers made no mention of any state-sanctioned relief efforts, though individual sultans and amirs were typically more generous with their alms whenever they themselves fell sick, hoping God would reward their charity with a cure.</p><p>The sense of insecurity and trauma brought by calamity and misrule may have encouraged Mamluk-era historians to increasingly supplement their record of events with commentary on the conditions of the wider city and common people. Al-Maqrizi (1364–1442), the <a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=NBu9nE7QuEw">most prolific</a> among them, opined that the Nile disasters were not merely acts of God or unlucky natural patterns but a product of three human causes: a corrupt government lubricated with bribery, extreme rent-seeking and hoarding behavior by the moneyed and landowning classes, and the reckless policy of flooding the market with low-value, inflationary copper coins.</p><p>“Whoever reflects on this occurrence from its beginning to its end and knows its origin and development realizes that what has befallen the population is caused solely by the malfeasance of the leaders and rulers and their negligence with regard to the public interest,” he wrote in <a href="https://archive.org/details/mamlukeconomicss0000maqr">his treatise</a> <cite>Helping the Community by Examining the Causes of Its Distress</cite> (<em>Ighathat al-ummah bi-kashf al-ghummah</em>). “Indeed, wherever the causes are known, it is easy for the knowledgeable person to remedy all conditions, whether significant or insignificant. I seek God’s help in facing both difficult and easy matters; indeed ‘He tells the truth and He shows the way.’”</p><p>The people in the streets had reached the same conclusion on their own. And when the powerful pushed too far, they pushed back.</p></div></section><section id="sec-2"><header><h2>Prayers Against the Sultan</h2></header><div><p>Al-Maqrizi’s chronicles record the constant protests that emerged in reaction to state depredation. Throughout the Middle Ages and even more frequently during the Mamluk period, ordinary people channeled their frustration through tax evasion, smuggling, blocking the sultan’s or governor’s processions, collective petitioning (shouted or in writing), and, in extreme cases, violence.</p><p>Those activities often came hand in hand, with petition typically following demonstration. Protest had no realistic chance of overturning state power (nor was that its purpose) but could apply sufficient pressure on authorities hoping to maintain their government positions and protect their property from physical damage. In pursuit of material reward and social correction, crowds applied violence systematically, indicating that they had a clear sense of a <a href="https://files.libcom.org/files/MORAL%20ECONOMY%20OF%20THE%20ENGLISH%20CROWD.pdf">moral economy</a> and the wrongness of transgressing it.</p><p>One favored tradition of anti-profiteering protesters was finding the local muhtasib they deemed responsible and stoning him. The Mamluk-era historian Ibn Taghribirdi <a href="https://catalog.hathitrust.org/Record/102028694">recorded</a> how in 1435, a crowd in Cairo sent the muhtasib fleeing into the Citadel for protection. Another example of this occurred in 1487, when, amid rising grain prices, the muhtasib of Damascus was found to be mixing his government duties with his private involvement in the grain trade. Shams al-Din ibn Tulun recorded that an organized crowd found him patrolling the market and proceeded to unload its displeasure on him. These two officials may have suffered a nasty shock and some injuries, but they were fortunate compared to the governor and deputy governor of Damietta in 1417, who, as al-Maqrizi records, were “arrested” by the crowd, humiliated, and then struck dead.</p><p>The elite response to such protests was varied. Amina Elbendary <a href="https://aucpress.com/9789774167171/">writes</a> in <cite>Crowds and Sultans: Urban Protest in Late Medieval Egypt and Syria</cite> of the fluidity of such crowds and indeed of social categories in general. The protesters, consisting not just of the “structural/permanent poor” but also artisans, shopkeepers, and lower-level clerics, often sought out members of the clerical establishment (<em>ulama</em>), or even a muhtasib they considered to be morally upright, to intercede with the government on their behalf. In the case of the 1417 incident at Damietta, the crowd brought some of their local religious judges to register a case against the same governor they were about to lynch.</p><p>These actions sometimes elicited refusal or even more punitive taxes. Other times, the protest and subsequent petition secured localized, temporary alleviation rather than structural reforms. But the broader tradition of protesting economic predation was understood by both rulers and the people as a constant threat or leverage that punished anyone who overstepped the line.</p><p>Muslims are instructed by the Qur’an and hadith to <a href="https://sunnah.com/nawawi40:34">enjoin good</a> and forbid wrong — a commandment that extends beyond personal survival and piety to the proactive pursuit of social justice. Innocent victims of misfortune could be seen as casualties of elite misconduct or, if they bore their suffering patiently, even as martyrs. But a society that accepted unjust rulers and did not rise up against them was itself complicit. Both sides, then, took their case to God. In a crisis, the ruling class organized mass public prayers for rain. Protesters often shouted “God is great” before a demonstration, and chroniclers described such moments by writing that “prayers against the sultan [or governor] increased.”</p><p>The Mamluk regime did not survive the collapse of its trade revenue, driven by Portuguese naval ambitions, and the Ottoman advance into the Levant and Egypt. Qansuh al-Ghuri, the penultimate Mamluk sultan, regarded by chroniclers as the <a href="https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231882763_Twilight_of_majesty_The_reigns_of_the_Mamluk_Sultans_al-Ashraf_Qaytbay_and_Qansuh_al-Ghawri_in_Egypt_By_Carl_F_Petry_Occasional_Papers_4_pp_xiv_261_4_maps_Seattle_Middle_East_Center_Jackson_School_of_">most avaricious</a> among the rulers of that period, supposedly died of a stress- and battle-induced stroke on the plains of Marj Dabiq in front of his Qur’an readers.</p><p>A change in regime, however, did not keep people off the streets whenever greed or misrule threatened their livelihoods. In 1591, not long after the Cairenes “prayed against” him, Awis Pasha, the city’s governor, died of a stroke.</p></div></section><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/egypt-middle-ages-famine-class?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-21T17:16:47.754Z</published><summary type="text">Egypt in the Middle Ages was steeply class stratified. When the rains failed, the rich dined on hoarded grain while the starving poor ate grass. Periodically, the masses would erupt in revolt — sometimes with petitions, other times with stones.</summary></entry><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/wallace-history-nyc-class-struggle</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/wallace-history-nyc-class-struggle"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/jpeg" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/490998714975.jpg"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/490998714975.jpg" medium="image" type="image/jpeg"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/490998714975.jpg"/><title type="text">Mike Wallace, Gotham’s Chronicler</title><updated>2026-10-21T20:13:53.126588Z</updated><author><name>Joel Feingold</name></author><category label="Cities" term="Cities"/><category label="History" term="History"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><div><p>Mike Wallace once handed me a matchbook, the kind of paper trinket that served like ticker-tape as a currency of the twentieth-century city: given out at corner stores and newsstands, boxing matches and cafeterias, free-flowing from cigarette and candy booths on subway platforms.</p><p>These flammable paper memes were often used for advertising: “Get yer alterations hemmed right here!” “Smoke Nat Shermans.” “Join the Army!” “Have a refreshing PAPAYA drink and a frank.” You could strike a match on an electioneering pitch or on a slogan: “Vote Jimmy Walker and good old Tammany!” “Boycott the Nazis and German goods.” “Look for the union label!” “Don’t buy where you can’t work!” You might strike your match on the matchbook from the nightclub you went to last Saturday night, or get a light walking home from the train at the end of the day, tired but relieved, as the next shift jammed the streets and the subway. Even the commanding heights had their own matchboxes and matchbooks, monogrammed like: Paul D. Cravath, Partner: Cravath, Swaine &amp;amp; Moore, ACQUISITIONS &amp;amp; TRUSTS.</p><p>Mike’s matchbook — all caps in an emphatic mid-century corporate-recruiting Helvetica, embossed on a cardboard square flint the hue of a big yellow taxi — said:</p><blockquote><p>EARN BIG MONEY!</p><p>BECOME A HISTORIAN</p></blockquote><p>And on the reverse:</p><blockquote><p>SUBSCRIBE TO THE RADICAL HISTORY REVIEW</p></blockquote><p>I doubled over in laughter; this was a great sight gag, I thought. I also felt in that split second that I understood what Wallace, the legendary historian of New York City who died July 4, was trying to tell me about his life’s work.</p><figure><img alt="A matchbook cover advocating an anti-Nazi boycott" height="1394" loading="lazy" src="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/752412322764.jpg" width="1000"/><figcaption>An anti-Nazi matchbook cover (<cite>Ephemeral New York</cite>)</figcaption></figure><p>Writing a new history of the world in one city was also a project to find, underneath the pavement, the beach: Coney Island’s beach to be precise, that real-life proletarian paradise, the garden at the edge of the workers’ city where you went to get lucky, or try your luck, or when you were down on your luck: the place you could always go if your luck ran out, to make yourself new again with everyone else there on the boardwalk and the beach. From this Coney Island of the mind, as Wallace wrote in the his Gotham book series’ rare mystic note in the first volume’s introduction, the city appeared all at once as a “mountain valley filled with a turquoise lake, in the middle of which floated a thousand-petaled lotus flower.”</p><p>That flower, I argue, is the class-struggle-<em>in-uno-plures</em> tradition (“in one, many”), defiant and improbably jutting out of the Manhattan schist, face-to-face with the silk-stocking districts and their eugenic worldview.</p><p><em>In uno plures</em> (“in one, many”) was a Mike Wallace coinage, a core concept in both <cite>Greater Gotham</cite> and <cite>Gotham at War</cite> — and in some ways the main character of the Gotham series, which you can read as a genesis story of the gorgeous mosaic and the city’s built environment and creed. Reversing the melting-down imagery of the American ruling class’s national motto “<em>e pluribus unum</em>” — instead of the commanding heights’ vision of “out of many, one” — working-class Gotham has long insisted that wholeness only exists where there’s infinite diversity, that radical pluralism is the only possible unity.</p><figure><img alt="" height="467" loading="lazy" src="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/564642207013.jpg" width="640"/><figcaption>A photograph of Coney Island, unknown date. (Bain News Service / Library of Congress)</figcaption></figure><p>This tradition originated from and belongs to New York’s working class and its organizations, and, by association, to all the workers of the world. As the International Ladies’ Garment Workers Union [ILGWU] Local #22 May Day float put it in 1934: “The Power of Labor Lives in Organization and Militancy: Workers of 32 Nationalities United.” Their banner envisioned the dressmakers’ union as a force “Fighting for One Cause — The Cause of Labor.” This tradition has echoed down the ages — the source of the city’s social democracy.</p><p>I heard it this spring, when an eighty-year-old Chinese American woman named Yu Story rallied her neighbors to beat back the city’s attempts to demolish and privatize their public housing on 26th Street, in the once-Irish working-class blocks along the west side docks, now a working-class neighborhood of people from all over the world, in spite of the masters of the universe. Ms Story said, “We are people. . . .  We are the hero.”</p><p>That class-struggle-<em>in-uno-plures</em> tradition — the flower — is exactly what E. B. White captured in ink in the <cite>New Yorker</cite> on April 14, 1945, at the moment it was co-opted and tamed from above, becoming the liberal common sense of postwar American politics. In this starry-eyed Victory in Europe Day context, as the world powers wondered where the United Nations would be headquartered, White acknowledged the debt this new emerging ideology owed to New York’s working class — to Gotham — because here was</p><blockquote><p>a sort of world state in miniature. Here dwell the world’s emigrants under one law, and the law is: Thou shalt not push thy neighbor around. By some curious divinity which in him lies, Man, in this experiment of mixed races and mixed creeds, has turned out more good than bad, more right than wrong, more kind than cruel, and more sinned against than sinning. This is the world’s hope and its chance.</p></blockquote><p>This is the apotheosis of the class-struggle-<em>in-uno-plures</em> tradition forged by workers and immigrants on the streets of New York, now taken up and toned down by the ruling classes as an ideal for the governance of the whole world, from the place that model originated (and where the victory over fascism and the new model of imperial free trade would be anchored): of course the United Nations had to be headquartered in New York.</p><p>A reminder of this idealist variation on the class-struggle-<em>in-uno-plures</em> tradition and its more militant source is desperately needed in New York and in the world today: now the flower confronts perhaps the ugliest and most brutal expression of the social Darwinism and habitual dog-eat-dog cruelty of the rich in nearly a century.</p><p>The Gotham project set out to deliver history to the reader as something alive, something we are all a part of, something that can be acted on, something that we can <em>change</em>. The matchboxes they gave out everywhere in this town used to say, “Strike anywhere.”</p></div><section id="sec-1"><header><h2>Write the Whole City Down</h2></header><div><p>I worked as Mike’s researcher for almost fifteen years, from the fall of 2011, the season of Occupy Wall Street (when Mike would look the other way if we’d skip a seminar or two to march on the banks) to the fall of 2025, just before the general strike in Minnesota’s Twin Cities began last winter. One generation gave way again to the next. We were drawn together by a shared commitment to finding a usable past and a shared conviction that the only way to do this was to write the whole city down.</p><p>While I assembled two of Wallace’s 2,500-source bibliographies — and as I wrote thousands of comments on drafts of <cite>Greater Gotham</cite> and <cite>Gotham at War</cite> — the months became years, then a decade and a half. What began as an apprenticeship became a search for the whole of human experience in the city. Only Mike’s droll, cheerful, and humanistic Marxism could really capture it all, that unique Wallace vision of history.</p><p><em>In uno plures:“</em>in one, many.” Here also was the Gotham project’s research design and historical method from the very beginning, the necessary result of synthesizing all the new history from below — as Wallace and Edwin G. Burrows set out to do nearly fifty years ago, when they began to write the city’s history anew “from the Beginning of the World,” as its first biographer Washington Irving had envisioned in 1809. Gotham would be a new coming together of women’s history, working-class history, black and native history, immigration history, the history of sexuality, the history of mass culture, and the collision of a million different folkways transformed by the tenements — arraying all that new history from below against the new history from above: the history of capitalism.</p><p>This was not your old man’s “synthesis” — not the simple additive method Wallace learned from his teacher Richard Hofstadter. But perhaps Wallace turned Hofstadter on his head. “Social Darwinism” was, of course, a Richard Hofstadter coinage: one of several enduring ideas that he has passed down to us. Hofstadter’s classic wartime dissertation <cite>Social Darwinism</cite> charted the origins and trajectory of a homegrown American fascist ideology with roots deep in the American experience: “A people long familiar with Indian warfare on the frontier and the pro-slavery arguments of Southern politicians and publicists had been thoroughly grounded in notions of racial superiority.”</p><p>Summing up the origins and trajectory of this ideology, Hofstadter quoted a particularly bloodthirsty 1845 American expansionist: “The Mexican race now see in the fate of the aborigines of the north, their own inevitable destiny. They must amalgamate or be lost in the superior vigor of the Anglo-Saxon race, or they must utterly perish.” Wallace, for his part, did not fail to trace the origins of a “Manifest Destiny” ideology of American conquest to New York boosters, but followed his teacher’s 1944 aside: “Yet it is possible to take another view. . . . ” Mike also showed us that Gotham and its people fought back, in how some New Yorkers have always demanded an end to imperialism, pulling for the victory of the oppressed in homelands all over the hemisphere and in every corner of the world.</p><p><cite>Gotham at War</cite> records that ever “since Francisco de Miranda’s 1806 expedition sailed from the East River in its doomed attempt to liberate South America from Spanish rule, New York had been the premier base of operations for rebel Latin Americans. Once the Wars of Independence triumphed in the 1820s, leaving Cuba and Puerto Rico as Spain’s only hemispheric possessions, an array of exiles, from Félix Varela to José Martí” made Gotham not just the seat of American expansionism and settler colonialism, but also held out the promise that New York could be the tomb of imperialism.</p><p>Certainly, in the city from a very early date, visions of racial conquest and extermination were anathema to a creed emerging from the streets. As Mary Louise Booth wrote in her 1859 <cite>History of the City of New York</cite>, Gotham was already “blended with all the races of the earth; and if it be true, as one of our most eminent philosophers asserts, that a mixture of many materials makes the best mortar, there is no reason to regret it.”</p><p>This was decidedly <em>not</em> the consensus in many layers of New York society in the middle of the nineteenth century. As Wallace and Hofstadter argued together in 1970 in <cite>American Violence</cite>, the brutal downtown nativism of Bill the Butcher — who cracked heads and stole ballots at the polling places of immigrant workers on Park Row and the Bowery in the early 1850s — was just muscle for the millionaires uptown. “A high proportion of our violent actions,” Hofstadter wrote in his introduction to the sources Wallace excavated and arranged, “has thus come from the top dogs or the middle dogs. Such has been the character of most mob and vigilante movements. This may help explain why so little of it has been used against state authority, and why in turn it has been so easily and indulgently forgotten.”</p><p>Overlaid by the capitalist ethos of domination by the strong, premised on natural hierarchies and scientific racism, this peculiar American vision was crystalized in the Gilded Age maxim attributed to (but never actually uttered by) the New York robber baron Jay Gould: “I can hire one half of the working class to kill the other half.”</p><p>As the nineteenth century gave way to the crisis of imperialism and World War I, this elitist current in America came to espouse a politics of panic over “threatened Anglo-Saxon power throughout the world.” In a United States “submerged by a flood of non-Anglo-Saxon immigrants,” the white men of America could assert “fitness only through a national reawakening.”</p><p>In some ways, Hofstadter suggests, American social-Darwinist ideology and practice was a model for European fascism. Picking this thread up where his teacher left off, Wallace shows us in <cite>Gotham at War</cite> that Jim Crow segregation and American race law (the one-drop rule and otherwise) directly inspired Adolf Hitler. The Führer taunts us from the pages of <cite>Gotham at War</cite> that the United States was “the first to draw practical political consequences from the differentiation of races.. . . .  Through its immigration law, America has inhibited the unwelcome influence of such races as it has been unable to tolerate within its midst.”</p><p>The children of the new immigrants roared back from City College, where the young radicals of the 1930s wore pins that said: “I am a guttersnipe. I fight fascism.”</p><p>Among the most famous false prophets of this early American fascism was the Upper East Side’s own Madison Grant. The pseudoscientist, professional racist, and prominent advocate of immigration restriction lived in a mansion at 960 Fifth Avenue between 77th and 78th Streets, overlooking Central Park and the Metropolitan Museum of Art. In these sumptuous digs in 1934, Grant gratefully received a letter from Hitler hailing <cite>The Passing of the Great Race</cite> as “my Bible.”</p><p>Where Hofstadter was often (and with age, increasingly) preoccupied by the dark currents in American life — social Darwinism, the paranoid style, anti-intellectualism — it took Wallace and the revolution in history from below to find what his teacher had shown only glimmers of: solidarity and pluralism as the working class’s antidote and answer.</p><p>In 1943 and 1944, as the war shuddered into its nightmare end, and as the question of the postwar order hung in the air, the young Hofstadter looked back a generation, to the Progressive historian Herbert Croly’s injunction: We must overcome the “traditional American ‘mixture of optimism, fatalism, and conservatism’ in favor of a more positive attempt to realize the national potential.” Sneaking in his own youthful Marxism the best he could, the twenty-seven-year-old Hofstadter quoted a dissident scholar’s 1906 anti-eugenic salute to “the proletariat, the working class, the hewers of wood and drawers of water” — and concluded “that the physical well-being of men is a result of their social organization and not vice versa.”</p><p>As Angela Davis — who lived on the corner of St Marks and Kingston in Crown Heights, Brooklyn, as a teenager, having fled Alabama in the middle of the 1950s to attend high school in Gotham — would put it years later: “One cannot be free alone. Freedom is collective.”</p></div></section><section id="sec-2"><header><h2>New York Will Never Have Another Mike Wallace</h2></header><div><p>Mike made a point never to preach, often even avoiding arguments about the meaning of events in the sweep of history. The pointillist, humanistic method would show the truth.</p><p>But Mike <em>was</em> a radical, active in the movement to remake American history from below in a struggle with the city’s ruling class. As Hofstadter’s research assistant, Wallace had the keys to several buildings on the Columbia University campus — and while his teacher veered from a wry and erudite consensus liberalism into bitter attacks on the “book burners” and ruffians of the New Left, it was Mike who quietly opened the doors to these buildings so that his comrades in the black and antiwar student movements could occupy them in April and May of 1968, in solidarity with the people of Harlem and the people of Vietnam.</p><p>Wallace maintained these commitments throughout his life. As a junior scholar at the City University of New York’s John Jay College, he coauthored the Newt Davidson Collective’s 1974 <cite>Crisis at CUNY</cite>, immediately recognizing in the “fiscal crisis” an attack on the social democratic victories of generations of working-class youth movements in the city’s public university system. The bankers’ abolition of CUNY’s free tuition — a policy that had stood since City College’s inception in 1847 — was realized by 1976, as were the first limitations on the open admissions policy that guaranteed every graduate of a New York City high school a spot in a CUNY college: a victory secured by black and Puerto Rican student radicals in the City College sit-ins of 1969 and only completely eliminated by Rudy Giuliani’s mayoral administration in 1999.</p><p>Mike’s instant recognition of the rise of neoliberalism in Gotham helped shape his colleague David Harvey’s view that the first salvos of a coordinated attack on working-class power and social democracy were waged simultaneously in Abraham Beame’s New York and Augusto Pinochet’s Chile. In 1973 — the last time the Knicks won the NBA championship — CUNY was free and open to every New Yorker. The Knicks have won again, and it is high time to retake that higher-education victory too.</p><p>As a professor, Wallace reveled in the atmosphere of John Jay College of Criminal Justice, teaching working-class kids and first-year cops in rough-and-tumble night school sessions. He told me he usually got along with the rookie cops and the kids because, unlike the ivory-tower liberals, they often shared a materialist understanding of the city and the world (“follow the money”) and most also shared the streets of New York as a first teacher.</p><p>Mike was born in Brooklyn in 1942 and came up in Fresh Meadows, Queens; he spent a spell as a child in San Francisco (where his uncle Al was a Latin jazz and swing bandleader); and he graduated from high school in Great Neck, Long Island. Wallace’s standard assignment for a final paper was to interview the oldest New Yorker you knew about their life coming up in the big city — showing students that we are all a part of history, and that we can all write it too.</p><p>A generation of City University and Wallace-trained scholars continue the work in his wake: Emily Brooks (<cite>Gotham’s War Within a War: Policing and the Birth of Law-and-Order Liberalism in World War II–Era New York City</cite>); Michelle Chen (among many other works, “Radical Defense: The American Committee for the Protection of the Foreign Born and the Movement for Deportation Resistance and Immigrants’ Rights,” in <cite>Journal of Migration History</cite>); Andy Battle (“New York 2140: Climate Change and Gentrification in Tomorrow’s Ruined New Yorks,” in <cite>Capitalism Nature Socialism</cite>; “On the Auction Block: The Garment Industry and the Deindustrialization of New York City,” in <cite>International Labor and Working-Class History</cite>); and Katie Uva (“1964 and the State of the City,” in <cite>World’s Fairs in the Cold War</cite>), among many others.</p><p>New York will never have another teacher or partisan like Mike. Everyone who has ever lived here, or traveled here, or dreams of this place inherits the life work of the city’s singer and the keeper of its memory. Mike Wallace died on July 4, 2026. Whenever someone speaks a word or takes a step anywhere in the five boroughs, we weave a new thread in the story he wrote down, for all of us to keep forever.</p></div></section><section id="sec-3"><header><h2>With the People in the City</h2></header><div><p>On the East Side, where Le Corbusier’s United Nations complex was built over the ruins of slaughterhouses on land long owned by the Astors, New York became the headquarters of the world (if not ever truly the capital of the world).</p><figure><img alt="The United Nations headquarters in Midtown Manhattan " height="1361" loading="lazy" src="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/344847470832.jpg" width="1280"/><figcaption>The United Nations headquarters in Midtown Manhattan (Jakub Hałun / <a href="https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/4.0/deed.en">CC BY-SA 4.0</a>)</figcaption></figure><p>This was one of the many ways that Wallace thought he’d conclude <cite>Gotham at War</cite>. Seeing parallels in the postwar corporate economy — the skyscraper headquarters of multinational capital towering over Midtown, the canyons of brick and concrete rippling out from Wall Street — the sleek glass and steel tower of the General Assembly of the United Nations (at 405 East 42nd Street and First Avenue) reflected a world order orbiting New York City, in the city’s image, and in its model of consolidated corporate capital. Gotham presumed only to be the central and highest node in the organizational chart of a worldwide network of offices. And like the corporate boardrooms atop the multinationals’ skyscrapers, the world powers convened a security council, where the real power from above was.</p><p>Here then are the architectonics of the whole Gotham trilogy, the big argument now assuming full form. The city came into being as a colonial periphery, then it was a model and metonym for the nation, now it was the headquarters of the postwar world made in its image: pluralistic, multilateralist, free trade, linked to the center by Wall Street finance, the city itself governed as a social democracy with a restive and powerful working class but an even more powerful ruling class: they’re about to be the masters of the universe.</p><p>For all of the explanatory power of Mike’s (usually) unstated argument, Gotham as the song of the city is at most revealing when it is on the ground, with the people, in the city. Wallace’s prelapsarian image of the Bronx — before the development wave at the turn of the twentieth century that turned it into an instant garden city — is gorgeous social history, a landscape of “Romani tinkers, scissor grinders, fishermen with shad from the North River,” when Morrisania</p><blockquote><p>and Melrose were chiefly German. Villagers worked in the local breweries.. . . .  They worshiped at local Lutheran and Catholic churches and shopped and amused themselves along Courtlandt Avenue — known as ‘Dutch [Deutsch] Broadway’ for its German saloons, beer halls, and gymnastic and singing societies.</p></blockquote><p>Meanwhile:</p><blockquote><p>Highbridgeville, an Irish settlement since the building of the Croton Aqueduct, afforded work for railroad section hands, stevedores along the Harlem River docks, and gardeners.</p></blockquote><p>Wallace had an eye for old, deep histories that would generally go unremarked, little jetties of liberation in the larger streams of municipal history. Like the Union American Methodist Episcopal Church of Staten Island, founded by free black workers as early as 1801, anchor of a black community in Stapleton for the last 225 years.</p><figure><img alt="The Stapelton Union American Methodist Episcopal Church of Staten Island " height="720" loading="lazy" src="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/529773623322.jpg" width="1280"/><figcaption>The Stapelton Union American Methodist Episcopal Church of Staten Island (Jim Henderson / <a href="https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/4.0/deed.en">CC BY-SA 4.0</a>)</figcaption></figure><p>The welter of working-class life in Gotham produced solidarity and pluralism — not out of neighborly love or multicultural idealism but out of sheer necessity. Wallace, in rare argumentative interludes in <cite>Greater Gotham</cite>, makes it plain. For workers in the twentieth-century city:</p><blockquote><p>Forging alliances with other ethnic groups was a practical necessity if they were to build a collective base of resistance to exploitation. . . . there had always been strenuous inter-ethnic competition over jobs, housing, and access to public resources, a jostling exacerbated by economic crisis, ethno-racial-religious tensions, and repercussions from overseas conflicts.</p></blockquote><p>Confronted with these obstacles, workers in New York sought to</p><blockquote><p>overcome them, by learning each other’s languages, celebrating together on birthdays, at baby showers, and at weddings, and organizing the labor movement side by side. Picket lines and Labor Day parades were routinely multi-ethnic affairs, marchers hoisting signs and banners in multiple languages. Industrial unionists were particularly determined to bridge ethnic fault lines: there were, as Big Bill Haywood put it, “no foreigners in the working class.”</p></blockquote><p>This is to say: the United Nations <em>already existed</em> on the streets of Gotham — and in that and other ways, New York was a model for, metonym of, and capital of the emerging postwar order.</p></div></section><section id="sec-4"><header><h2>If We Ever Finish It</h2></header><div><p>Mike’s last story is the madcap tale of the real estate deal that brought the United Nations to town in 1946. This evokes nothing so much as Washington Irving’s original Gotham — a city of ridiculous “bulbous-bottomed burghers” spreading “forth over the land until they covered the actual site of this venerable city.”</p><p>In literal landownership and in spirit, Wallace’s last tale about the Astors and the slaughterhouses and the land that became the United Nations harkens all the way back to old John Jacob Astor himself: “If I could live all over again, I would buy every square inch of Manhattan.”</p><p>There’s an important question here about the “capital of the world” argument that Mike leaves to us. What about New York as the center of the postwar world was historical necessity amid the longue durée?</p><figure><img alt="A 1901 photograph of the Manhattan skyline, taken from Brooklyn" height="491" loading="lazy" src="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/667997760089.jpg" width="1000"/><figcaption>A 1901 view of the Manhattan skyline, captured from Brooklyn (Irving Underhill)</figcaption></figure><p>What about the big architectonics — class struggle <em>in uno plures</em>; what Samuel Stein has called New York’s “real estate state;” the city’s place in the military-industrial complex; Wall Street; the diasporic links New York already had to the rest of the world — made the contingent possible, sealed the deal? How then can we account for the very contingent, uncertain, touch-and-go way it came about?</p><p>There’s something to be said here on New York and the “real estate state” — its longue durée in Gotham. All I know is, as O. Henry once said, “It’ll be a great place if they ever finish it.”</p><p>As Mike once wrote, at the end of <cite>Greater Gotham</cite>: So far, so good.</p></div></section><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/wallace-history-nyc-class-struggle?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-21T16:23:09.204Z</published><summary type="text">Historian Mike Wallace, author of the Gotham trilogy of New York City history and winner of the Pulitzer Prize, tried to capture everything about New York and the world through a droll, cheerful, humanistic Marxism.</summary></entry><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/capital-labor-share-income-power</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/capital-labor-share-income-power"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/jpeg" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/658558494366.jpg"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/658558494366.jpg" medium="image" type="image/jpeg"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/658558494366.jpg"/><title type="text">Profits Are Soaring. Workers’ Share of Income Is Sinking.</title><updated>2026-10-21T15:33:02.119496Z</updated><author><name>Conor Lynch</name></author><category label="Capital" term="Capital"/><category label="Inequality" term="Inequality"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><div><p>Outside periods of recession, the public mood has rarely been as downbeat about the economy as it is today, with consumer confidence at a <a href="https://www.cnbc.com/2026/09/29/consumer-optimism-slides-sharply-as-fears-escalate-over-rising-prices-and-jobs.html">historic low</a> and <a href="https://www.pewresearch.org/politics/2026/07/23/americans-evaluations-of-the-economy-remain-negative/">polls recording</a> a <a href="https://yougov.com/en-us/trackers/state-of-us-economy">deep pessimism</a> about where things are headed. Against this backdrop, political and business leaders are touting an economic “golden age,” pointing to <a href="https://www.axios.com/2026/10/05/trump-economy-prices-voters-polling">solid growth</a>, stable unemployment, <a href="https://www.wsj.com/business/earnings/corporate-profit-america-44836dc6">record profits</a>, and a stock market that seems to only go up. The vibes on Main Street are gloomy, but on Wall Street they are nearly euphoric.</p><p>One way to understand this growing disconnect between everyday people and elites is to examine how today’s celebrated gains are distributed across the economy compared with earlier periods. To do that, economists typically look at the national income and how much of it goes to workers — the “labor share” — versus the portion that flows to capital in profits and rents. (Together labor and profits make up roughly two-thirds of gross domestic income; the remaining third is absorbed by rents, taxes, and a mix of other smaller categories.)</p><p>The US Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) tracks the labor share of the nonfarm business sector (the private economy minus agriculture) with quarterly data going back to 1947. For most of the twentieth century, that share was remarkably stable: it rose during recessions, as business income fell, and it declined as companies regained profitability, yet it never dropped below 60 percent and averaged around 63 percent. Labor’s consistent capture of about two-thirds of the national income was, in <a href="https://cepr.org/voxeu/columns/trying-account-decline-labour-share">the words</a> of John Maynard Keynes, “one of the most surprising, yet best-established, facts in the whole range of economic statistics.”</p><p>This historical pattern began to shift around the turn of the century. After peaking at 64 percent during the 2001 recession, the labor share began a long slide, falling below 60 percent for the first time in 2004 and staying there ever since. More recently, this long-term decline has accelerated. In September, the BLS <a href="https://www.bls.gov/opub/ted/2026/labor-share-at-its-lowest-level-52-8-percent-in-second-quarter-2026.htm">announced</a> that the labor share had dropped to its lowest level on record for the fourth quarter in a row.</p><p>The labor share now stands at 52.8 percent, more than ten points below its twentieth-century average. The downward trajectory coincides with <a href="https://www.bea.gov/data/income-saving/corporate-profits">rising profits</a> across <a href="https://www.wsj.com/business/earnings/corporate-profit-america-44836dc6">corporate America</a>. As a share of gross domestic income, corporate profits are now the <a href="https://www.axios.com/2026/06/26/ai-earnings-economy-stocks">highest</a> they’ve been since the <a href="https://www.wsj.com/finance/stocks/the-record-divide-between-corporate-profits-and-worker-pay-ea4c75bc">early 1950s</a> — at a time when hourly wage growth has cooled to a five-year low and is now <a href="https://www.nytimes.com/live/2026/10/02/business/jobs-report-economy">well behind</a> inflation.</p><p>Economists have offered many explanations for this trend. In a <a href="https://www.nber.org/system/files/working_papers/w29165/w29165.pdf">2021 paper</a>, Gene M. Grossman and Ezra Oberfield reviewed the vast literature on the subject and compiled the most commonly cited culprits, including technological change and automation, globalization and neoliberal trade policies, deindustrialization, increasing market concentration, the decline of unions, and more.</p><p>Beyond these structural causes, others have pointed to shifts in how some business owners and executives report their income. According to research by economists Matthew Smith, Danny Yagan, Owen Zidar, and Eric Zwick, roughly <a href="https://everywheremillionaire.substack.com/p/why-the-labor-share-keeps-falling">a third</a> of the decline in the corporate sector’s labor share between 1978 and 2017 can be attributed to changes in how business owners pay themselves and how this income is recorded in the national accounts. They largely attribute this change to the Tax Reform Act of 1986, which encouraged firms to organize as “pass-throughs” and <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/review-millionaires-wealth-distribution-pass-throughs">their owners</a> to take income as profits rather than wages. Among pass-through firms owned by the top 1 percent, the owners’ <a href="https://us.macmillan.com/books/9781250378507/theeverywheremillionaire/">share</a> of value added rose from 37 percent to 48 percent between 2001 and 2014, a gain that came at the expense of their employees.</p><p>The different theories of labor’s declining share are often framed as rival explanations. In practice, they’re pieces of the same political-economic shift. The neoliberal turn of the late 1970s ushered in a new era of shareholder capitalism, which made maximizing shareholder returns the organizing goal of the corporation. To deliver those returns, America’s business leaders waged a broad assault on the labor movement, using every lever available to curb worker power. Technology, globalization, and union busting all operated through the same channel toward that end.</p><p>This reality has led <a href="https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S0954349X22000078">some economists</a> to <a href="https://www.brookings.edu/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/StansburySummers-Final-web.pdf">put forward</a> a more “unified explanation,” one that identifies the decades-long erosion of worker power as the root cause of labor’s dwindling share.</p></div><section id="sec-1"><header><h2>The Hidden Wedge</h2></header><div><p>Dramatic as it is, the labor share decline understates how much income has moved away from ordinary workers over the last forty years, because it tells us nothing about the vast inequalities hidden within the labor share itself.</p><p>According to research by economists at the Economic Policy Institute (EPI), nearly <a href="https://www.epi.org/blog/wages-inequality-and-the-roots-of-americas-affordability-crisis/">80 percent</a> of the <a href="https://www.epi.org/productivity-pay-gap/">productivity-pay gap</a> — the widening gulf between productivity growth and pay gains for nonsupervisory workers — has been driven by inequalities <em>within</em> the labor share, with the shift toward capital accounting for the remaining 20 percent. Before 1979, wage growth for the vast majority of workers tracked closely with productivity gains and with the growing compensation of high-income earners. Since then, most of the gains from productivity have flowed to top earners and shareholders.</p><p>EPI’s <a href="https://www.epi.org/publication/inequality-2021-ssa-data/">analysis shows</a> that the bottom 90 percent of workers captured nearly 70 percent of all earnings in 1979, while the top 1 percent of earners took in a little over 7 percent. By 2021, the share of the bottom 90 percent had fallen by more than eleven points to 58.6 percent, while the top 1 percent of earners had doubled their share to nearly 15 percent — the highest point since the data became available in 1937. This trend was even more pronounced for the top 0.1 percent, whose share of earnings more than tripled, from 1.6 percent to 5.9 percent. Subtract the top 1 percent’s earnings, and the labor share falls well below its current historic low, by a much wider margin than in the past.</p><p>In an email, EPI Chief Economist Josh Bivens told <cite>Jacobin</cite> that the fall in the labor share and the growing inequality within it both stem from excess employer power in the labor market and decades of wage suppression. “Basically, I think a set of policies aimed at wage suppression have successfully slowed wage growth for the vast majority of workers,” Bivens said, “and this left a large and growing ‘excess’ wedge of income that went to much more privileged actors in the economy.”</p><p>Before 2000, most of this excess wedge showed up as rapid pay growth at the top of the income scale; during that period, as Bivens put it, “there was not a huge shift in the labor/profit shares.” Instead, top executives like General Electric CEO Jack Welch, poster boy of the shareholder revolution and <a href="https://www.historynewsnetwork.org/article/jack-welch-was-a-bitter-foe-of-american-workers">ruthless union-buster</a>, saw their pay explode. Between 1978 and 2000, the CEO-to-worker <a href="https://www.epi.org/blog/ceo-pay-surged-in-2025-ceos-are-paid-325-times-as-much-as-the-typical-worker/">pay ratio</a> at America’s top companies ballooned from under 25-to-1 to nearly 400-to-1.</p><p>Since the turn of the century, the excess has flowed more directly from labor to capital. “Post-2000, you see less of a wedge in pay growth between the very top and typical workers (still a big one, just not as big), but you start to see a noticeable rise in the profit share,” Bivens said. Part of this reflects changes in how business owners and executives report their income. The post-2000 shift away from labor coincided with a time when “a bunch of tax policy and regulatory policy changes made it more advantageous for super-privileged actors (corporate executives mostly) to report their income in forms that don’t show up in the labor share but do show up in the profit share.”</p><p>But reclassification explains only part of the shift. Profits also claimed a genuinely larger share of what the economy produced, boosting stock prices along with them.</p><p>Whether it flowed to executives or shareholders, this redistribution of income has been a driving force behind the rapid growth of both income and wealth inequality over the last half century. As Bivens and EPI President Heidi Shierholz point out in a <a href="https://www.epi.org/blog/wages-inequality-and-the-roots-of-americas-affordability-crisis/">recent essay</a>, estimates suggest that “anywhere from 40 percent to nearly 100 percent” of the nominal gains in the stock market since 1989 can be attributed to capital’s growing share of the national income.</p><p>The implication, they write, is clear: “The wage suppression of recent decades is not just by far the biggest driver of the rise in <em>income</em> inequality; it is also by far the biggest driver of the rise in <em>wealth</em> inequality.”</p></div></section><section id="sec-2"><header><h2>Labor and the AI Boom</h2></header><div><p>The recent acceleration in the labor share’s decline has unfolded alongside an explosion in corporate profits and the strongest stock market bull run since the dot-com era. Yet these surging profits and asset prices have been driven less by genuine productivity gains than by financial speculation and a series of market shocks — from the supply-chain disruptions of the pandemic years to the recent spike in energy costs triggered by the Iran war.</p><p>Apart from these <a href="https://www.npr.org/2026/07/31/nx-s1-5910660/big-oil-earnings-q2-2026">disaster-driven profits</a>, the stock market boom has been powered by <a href="https://www.wsj.com/finance/stocks/the-s-p-500-hits-a-new-record-high-powered-by-techand-not-much-else-66e01705">a handful</a> of <a href="https://www.axios.com/2026/03/23/stocks-ai-market-sp">superstar companies</a> concentrated in the tech sector. The top ten companies listed on the S&amp;amp;P 500 now make up <a href="https://am.jpmorgan.com/us/en/asset-management/institutional/insights/market-insights/market-updates/on-the-minds-of-investors/how-extreme-is-market-concentration/">roughly 40 percent</a> of the index’s total market cap and generate over a third of its earnings, buoyed by the <a href="https://www.nytimes.com/2026/08/14/business/ai-tech-profits.html">debt-fueled</a> artificial intelligence boom.</p><p>These record profits are unlikely to last. If the current AI boom goes bust, as a <a href="https://futurism.com/future-society/mainstream-news-anchors-bloomberg-tv-ai-bubble-bursting">growing number</a> of <a href="https://www.cnbc.com/2026/09/28/michael-burry-believes-the-ai-bubble-may-burst-sooner-than-he-first-believed.html">market watchers</a> now believe <a href="https://www.bloomberg.com/news/articles/2026-10-07/ray-dalio-warns-ai-bubble-is-approaching-burst-point">it will</a>, earnings will plummet, and the profit share will decline relative to labor. But workers, not shareholders, invariably bear the brunt of recessions. Labor currently has little to gain and much to lose from the breakneck development of AI, especially if it proves as disruptive to jobs as <a href="https://moneywise.com/news/economy/nobel-economist-acemoglu-ai-unemployment-warning">many economists</a> and AI boosters predict. Yet workers have even less to gain from a recession triggered by the collapse of the AI bubble, which would create ideal conditions for capital to further discipline labor — this time with some of the shiny new AI tools developed over the last several years.</p><p>The path to avoiding these outcomes and reversing the long-term decline of the labor share lies in a revitalized labor movement. As long as labor is weak and fragmented, workers will continue to see their share of the economic pie contract as billionaires and CEOs reap the rewards of the new AI economy.</p><p>The <a href="https://www.nytimes.com/2026/10/13/us/politics/uaw-shawn-fain.html">recently reelected</a> president of the United Auto Workers (UAW), Shawn Fain, wasn’t being hyperbolic this June when <a href="https://www.youtube.com/shorts/Zdx2VJfXmrg">he described</a> the development of AI and the push for mass automation as a “profound threat and challenge to our way of life.” The compounding threats that workers now face have, in turn, increased public support and sympathy for labor unions. In September, Gallup’s annual survey on the labor movement showed that more than <a href="https://news.gallup.com/poll/713936/record-high-unions-influence.aspx">seven in ten</a> Americans now approve of unions — the highest level since the 1960s — along with a record-high plurality of 47 percent who say that unions should have more influence.</p><p>Fain is among a cohort of new labor leaders who have pushed for a bolder and more combative labor movement willing to take the fight to capital. The UAW’s successful “stand-up strike” against the Big Three automakers in 2023 was part of a new wave of <a href="https://www.bls.gov/web/wkstp/annual-listing.htm">labor action</a> in the post-pandemic years. New organizing efforts have also helped to slowly reverse the long-term decline in unionization, with data from <a href="https://www.epi.org/press/union-membership-rose-in-2025-including-among-federal-workers/">the BLS</a> showing the number of workers represented by unions rising to a <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/us-news/2026/feb/18/union-membership-increase-trump-assault">sixteen-year high</a> in 2025.</p><p>Whether the labor movement can sustain its current momentum is far from certain. What <em>is</em> clear is that its strength and influence will need to grow substantially in the years ahead if it is to meaningfully shape the emerging AI economy and shift the balance of power back toward workers. Until then, the economic gains touted by political and industry elites will almost certainly continue flowing straight to the top.</p></div></section><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/capital-labor-share-income-power?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-21T15:33:02.119496Z</published><summary type="text">Working people’s share of national income has fallen to a record low, even as corporate profits soar to unthinkable new heights. The trend reflects decades of eroded worker power, and reversing it will take a revitalized labor movement.</summary></entry><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/weber-interview-antifascist-economics-affordability</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/weber-interview-antifascist-economics-affordability"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/jpeg" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/982568720036.jpg"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/982568720036.jpg" medium="image" type="image/jpeg"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/982568720036.jpg"/><title type="text">Isabella Weber on How to Defeat the Far Right</title><updated>2026-10-22T13:01:46.816018Z</updated><author><name>Isabella Weber</name></author><author><name>Bartolomeo Sala</name></author><category label="Economy" term="Economy"/><category label="Politics" term="Politics"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><div><p>The economist Isabella Weber is best known for her work on what is often called “seller’s inflation,” the ability of firms with market power to hike prices and boost profits during an emergency. During and after the COVID-19 pandemic, Weber was one of the loudest voices criticizing those who treated inflation purely as a product of too much demand, earning the censure of establishment economists in the process. Six years on, her arguments have been largely vindicated. It is clear that while constraints to supply did cause some prices to spike, the resulting cost shocks coordinated corporate pricing that spread inflation across the whole economy.</p><p>In her new book, <cite>Anti-Fascist Economics: In Defense of Affordability, Dignity, and Democracy</cite>, she turns to an equally pressing political issue: What is needed to stem the rising tide of far-right extremism? Her answer is an alternative economic playbook, building on her earlier work, which puts affordability of essentials and dignity at its center.</p><p>Weber spoke to <cite>Jacobin</cite> about what an economic system that prioritizes ordinary people’s material needs over corporate profits would look like, and how it could contribute to halting the march of what some have called fascism in its tracks.</p></div><section id="sec-1"><header><hr/></header><dl><dt><p>Bartolomeo Sala</p><p>In your new book <cite>Anti-Fascist Economics</cite>, you build a powerful case for a new “economics for common people” as the only antidote to the threat of a resurgent “end-times fascism.”</p><p>You spend the central part of the book showing how Trump 2.0 was ultimately a consequence of high inflation that shot up the prices of essentials and ate into people’s standards of living. However, you open the book by showing the current threat to democracy is not the result of one mismanaged crisis. Rather, it is the inevitable end point of fifty years of neoliberalism and a system which puts profits above everything else.</p><p>How is it that neoliberalism — with its dogmatic insistence on what you call “profit fundamentalism” and limited view of freedom as submission to the impersonal rule of the market — almost necessarily leads to fascism?</p></dt><dd><p>Isabella Weber</p><p>Just one qualification before we start. I wouldn’t say neoliberalism <em>necessarily</em> leads to fascism. I think fascism is a very complex historical phenomenon that has multiple drivers, and the economy is one of them. Nevertheless, I think it’s helpful to see that there is a kind of convergence between the logics of the two, which is not to say that they are the same, but that, at bottom, they are both forms of social Darwinism.</p><p>In a neoliberal world, there is this idea that everyone’s worth has to be established on the market, that the market creates a meritocratic hierarchy. If you are rich and are on top of said hierarchy, it is because you have strong abilities, you are superior to others, you have achieved more. Conversely, if you are poor or if you are dependent on social transfers, then this is basically a result of your lack of abilities. Now, in this sense, neoliberalism is a very hierarchical, competition-based way of seeing the world. Under fascism, we don’t have a hierarchy that is established through the market, but a “natural” one. Indeed, the whole idea of fascism is that the decadence and despair of the present are the result of interventions against this natural hierarchy, and the job of fascism is to restore a mythical past where this natural hierarchy is again allowed to play out.</p><p>This natural hierarchy in the fascist case explicitly deems some populations dispensable. You see this very clearly with climate change, where if we let climate change happen, then some populations will die, or the energy crisis, where if we let the energy prices explode, then some people’s livelihoods may be destroyed. From the neoliberal perspective, this is an unfortunate collateral damage. Unfortunately, the market produces outcomes where some people’s livelihoods are destroyed. What the fascists do is to embrace this Malthusian logic that is baked into neoliberal thinking. They see it as a cleansing mechanism where some of these surplus populations are being cleaned out, and thus more space is made for the supreme race.</p></dd><dt><p>Bartolomeo Sala</p><p>So fascism is a kind of last resort for neoliberalism?</p></dt><dd><p>Isabella Weber</p><p>So far I have talked about neoliberalism as a system of thought. However, neoliberalism in practice, as a regime to organize our economy, has brought about spectacular wealth concentration, especially corporate concentration. Just to give you a statistic, in 1930, the top 0.1 percent of firms, in terms of their asset ownership, owned 47 percent of assets in the United States. In 2013, the top 0.1 percent owned 88 percent of the assets.</p><p>Now, the fact that neoliberalism brings about this concentration of power and conceals this process, thereby opening the door for the possibility for the fascists to embrace it, is one side of the coin. The other side of some people getting extremely rich is, of course, many people living enormously precarious lives and being constantly at the mercy of the next market turmoil. To be sure, economic insecurity is not the same as poverty, and often it’s those who have something to lose who are most receptive to the far right’s promises. It’s a lack of alternatives — which is programmatic under neoliberalism — and the powerlessness that comes with it that makes the fascist promise of restoring the self-worth of people whose lives have been degraded over decades by returning to a mythical past of racial purity appealing.</p></dd><dt><p>Bartolomeo Sala</p><p>The place where this inability to take common people’s material needs seriously manifested itself in full force and ultimately proved fatal is the idea of “vibecession,” that is, the idea that the US economy was booming post-COVID and that people who felt otherwise were just wrong.</p><p>Many of the arguments you made five years ago — that we were going through a crisis of affordability driven by corporations treating shocks and bottlenecks as an excuse to jack up prices — have become mainstream. However, at the time, the debate around high inflation was divided between those who advocated for austerity and those who suggested simply waiting for the storm to pass. Ultimately, this softer approach won out, but it did little to combat the effects of the ballooning cost of living.</p><p>What did it get wrong about what you at the time called a case of “seller-induced inflation”? What could have been done differently? And why was Joe Biden’s unwillingness to be more bullish with big business and go after their profits ultimately the cause of the Democrats’ downfall?</p></dt><dd><p>Isabella Weber</p><p>On the subject of who won the debate in terms of policy response: it is true that Team Wait-and-See prevailed in terms of fiscal policy, but we did get aggressive interest rate hikes eventually, which was the prescription of Team Austerity. That the fiscal side kept going strong partially offset monetary austerity. Anyway, sorry to be such a professor . . . </p></dd><dt><p>Bartolomeo Sala</p><p>That’s what we are here for!</p></dt><dd><p>Isabella Weber</p><p>Okay, going back to the subject of inflation, I think we need to realize what it is that happened in this crisis. First, we had a pandemic, the first global pandemic in a century. People were either locked down at home or working on the front lines exposed to the virus.</p><p>Then the economy restarted. However, due to all the dislocation that the shutdowns had created, suddenly there were lots of shortages. These shortages created a pretext for price hikes, but the way this played out depended on the sector: in the case of energy, there was a collapse in demand during the lockdowns. Oil companies then shut down some of their production capacity. When demand came back on, they were in no rush to bring capacity back up. This mismatch sent oil prices upward, and the Russian attack on Ukraine made them explode. The question then is: How does the rest of the corporate world react to an increase in energy prices? Do they absorb this price increase, or do they pass it on in ways that protect their margins or maybe even increase their margin? What we saw is that the corporate sector as a whole managed to claim record profits right in the middle of this crisis.</p><p>Now, this is an economic question. As a heterodox economist, my inclination is always to point to the structures, and my research shows how emergencies have opened windows of opportunity for price hikes. However, it’s also a question of morality and how we organize our society and economy. Capitalism is always immoral, but when, in a situation like this — where people have been fighting for their survival and the world has lived in fear over the threat of the virus — the reaction of the corporate sector is to jack up prices in ways that produce record profits, then this brings the immorality of capitalism out into plain sight. That’s why people were very angry about what myself and others called “greedflation.”</p><p>Then there is the question of lived reality. People keep going to work every day and see the price of essentials, from food to energy to housing to transportation, become more expensive. This forces them to impossible choices between buying another used car because the old one broke and paying rent. This creates an enormous sense of insecurity and anxiety. If you just go, “Okay, let’s wait for this to pass,” that’s just another demonstration of the inability of the government to act.</p><p>This is the contradiction that I start the book with. Under neoliberalism, governments say democracy is the greatest of all political systems, but when it comes to people’s basic material needs, unfortunately there seems to be nothing they can do. That’s already a contradiction in normal times, but even more so in crises, because people’s trust in democracy is then undermined in fundamental ways.</p></dd><dt><p>Bartolomeo Sala</p><p>And it’s not that these crises are one-offs, if anything, they will become ever more frequent.</p></dt><dd><p>Isabella Weber</p><p>We have seen it in polls time and again. As inflation progressed, more and more people started to blame corporations for high prices and believed the government should intervene and impose price controls. As you say, this is not ancient history, and these shocks are not random. We are in a global crisis of disintegration of our natural environments and geopolitical order that makes future, frequent shocks inevitable.</p><p>There is so much more to antifascist economics than targeted price controls for essentials. However, in a time of crisis like ours, the question of price stabilization for the things people cannot do without is ultimately a question of whether the government is going to intervene to secure people’s access to affordable living conditions, even if doing so means going against the interests of powerful corporations or those who insist that the market is the only arbiter and so expose their constituencies to deeply immoral outcomes.</p></dd><dt><p>Bartolomeo Sala</p><p>As you write in your chapter “Capital Won’t Save Democracy,” capitalists and fascists are natural allies today just as they were in the 1930s — not just because the latter line the pockets of the former when stripping the state for parts, but because fascists are the best bulwark for their monopolies. Indeed, the two share a common enemy, “democratic states . . . when they regulate business activities in the common interest, protect the environment, or uphold labor rights.” Can you tell us why the unholy alliance between Davos Men and strongmen like Donald Trump isn’t an anomaly but a natural development?</p></dt><dd><p>Isabella Weber</p><p>First of all, one of the things that really struck me about being in Davos in 2025 during the inauguration of Trump was that large parts of the business community appeared to me almost more like followers than leaders. Many of them didn’t donate to Trump, but the moment the power shifted, they went with Trump. They are profit fundamentalists and, as such, they will always go with power.</p><p>Now, to your question of what the democratic state does here, I actually found Javier Milei’s Davos speech very telling. He is the president of a country, of course, but he insists that all the problems that the West has are a result of feminist wokeness, which again goes back to this fascist idea that there are natural hierarchies and that if you are trying to intervene, you are messing up with the natural order. His diagnosis of the decline of the West is simply, “if only free enterprise had prevailed in its pure form, then we would not have had this aberration.” That’s I think how someone like Milei comes to embody the convergence between neoliberalism and fascism that we talked about in the beginning.</p><p>As to what’s actually happening in terms of who globalization is working for, the first China shock was really an outsourcing shock. China was one part of the story, but the other was multinational companies headquartered in the West that were perfectly happy to throw a significant share of the working class in Europe and the United States under the bus. The second China shock is a very different beast, which is why the name is somewhat misleading. This shock is one where the almost universal dominance of Western corporations is suddenly under threat, as Chinese companies approaching the technological frontier in key industries start to pose a serious challenge to a world hierarchy in the global division of labor that dates back to the nineteenth century.</p><p>What’s interesting is that the moment that exposure to markets, free capital flows, and open trade flows no longer is univocally to the benefit of Western-headquartered companies, the allegiances to these liberal ideals start flipping and instead an extreme anti-China “by any means necessary” stance ends up becoming mainstream. What I’m arguing is that this is important context that we need to acknowledge when we look at how globalization of the neoliberal type is being destroyed and is being replaced with tariff blitzes and geopolitical maneuvering that bring the whole toolbox of the might of states into the game of fortifying a certain global division of labor.</p></dd><dt><p>Bartolomeo Sala</p><p>If all that is possible is a zero-sum game between states and corporations, the best way to ride out the crisis is to invite it and hope to win, so at least in this zero-sum world you are the one calling the shots.</p></dt><dd><p>Isabella Weber</p><p>Exactly, it’s a zero-sum competition, which is now being fought with different means in a way, but it’s still a zero-sum competition.</p></dd><dt><p>Bartolomeo Sala</p><p>Could you talk a bit explicitly about how you understand antifascist economics?</p></dt><dd><p>Isabella Weber</p><p>An important inspiration is Karl Polanyi, who wanted to write a book, “Masterplan for the Common Man,” as an antifascist economics. For him, when there is a crisis that threatens the existential foundation of people’s lives, what he calls <i>countermovements</i> emerge. Fascism is a countermovement to fortify a profit fundamentalist order with state violence. What I am arguing is for a countermovement against today’s “end-times fascism” — to use Naomi Klein and Astra Taylor’s term — one that secures the material foundations of people’s livelihoods as the precondition for a dignified life as its overarching goal.</p><p>The starting point for this is, very concretely, essentials for meeting people’s needs and for production systems, because obviously, to fulfil those needs, we need to have certain production structures in place. That’s the core. Then there are affordability policies that keep all of this together — things like rent freezes, a basket of price-controlled goods, free public transportation, or public ownership of energy and affordable utilities — policies that bring immediate relief.</p><p>However, in order to sustain a price intervention, you need to change the structures of provisioning in these essential sectors. And that, ultimately, is a question of ownership. Given that we are in this global crisis of livelihoods, it’s not enough to bring down the price of gasoline and thereby render life more affordable to people who drive their cars, and meanwhile we burn through ever more oil and let the planet burn. We need to use those measures that stabilize prices to buy time for the structural change that can get us into a situation where our use of natural resources becomes compatible with the continued existence of human lives on planet Earth, which might sound a bit big, but I think that’s really what is at stake here.</p></dd><dt><p>Bartolomeo Sala</p><p>How can this economic outlook, that starts with people’s essential needs, work hand in hand with combating climate change and responding to anxieties about globalization?</p></dt><dd><p>Isabella Weber</p><p>Polanyi has this idea of land, labor, and money being essentials. I am basically broadening this category by saying that all the things that our life depends on are essentials, because for all of these things, it’s a lie that they can just work like the market for plastic toys or chewing gum. If the rent is too high, it’s not like you just reduce your demand. You need shelter and a place to live. And for a dignified life, you also need to be able to live where your friends are and where your family is. You cannot just be moved around like a fungible atom from one place to the next because rent went up. For food, it’s even more straightforward. You can’t say, the price of food went up, I’m not going to eat.</p><p>The question then becomes: How do you organize each of these sectors in ways to achieve short-run affordability and to change the structure of provisioning in service of, among other goals, climate stabilization? What I’m arguing for in the case of agriculture are buffer stock systems, ideally multilateral, where you have a public stockholding entity that buys when the prices collapse because there’s a bumper harvest and sells when there’s a supply shock that constrains supply and prices spike. Now, the effect of such an entity would not only be to stabilize prices but also to change the dynamic in a market where right now four global food commodity trading companies control 70 to 90 percent of global food commodity trading.</p><p>If you have such public stockholding systems, you basically build a massive procurement operation, because you start to buy grain and other durable commodities on a large scale. This allows you to set conditionalities: you only buy certain types of grain that are climate resilient; you buy types of grain that have been produced in a certain, environmentally friendly way. You then could combine it — indeed you should combine it — with a procurement and industrial policy for green fertilizers. By building out this public capacity, you also build out a lever that you can use to change the ways in which you organize food production in a sector — agriculture — that is one of the most difficult to decarbonize. By contrast, if you go in with carbon prices, in a context of already high inflation where food prices are up by more than 30 percent since 2019 like in the United States, you just make things worse.</p><p>The same principle applies to the housing crisis. If you implement rent freezes, then the next step is to create more public housing, which, in a city like Berlin, could include socialization of large-scale corporate landlords and real estate companies that already control significant shares of your housing supply. If you take this housing stock over and put it in public hands, you have a public option that has a significant impact on what is happening in the housing market as a whole. You need to build more, of course, but you can make sure it’s done in green ways. Same for energy. And then, when you take all three together and add other essentials like transportation, you really are getting into the territory where you are tackling significant shares of the resource use and emissions in your economy.</p></dd><dt><p>Bartolomeo Sala</p><p>Brilliant. We didn’t really get into the subject of global trade and how an agenda of this kind would remove the trigger for renewed competition and imperialism, which is a shame. Not sure if you have any final thoughts to add?</p></dt><dd><p>Isabella Weber</p><p>So maybe to wrap up: the idea is to put a floor under people’s livelihoods by guaranteeing affordable livelihoods in such a way that, over time, you change the ways they are provisioned. But you also put a ceiling on extreme forms of wealth and corporate power. This means of course taxing the ultrarich, antitrust laws that are willing to break up large corporations, but also public options and ownership. Because when you create public opinions, you create public power that can act as a counterpoint.</p><p>Now, if you look at this from a macroeconomic perspective, then what I am proposing also is a regime for “inflation preparedness,” because when shocks hit, you would not let the prices of energy and food commodities shoot up and create these knock-on effects across the economy, and then react with interest rate hikes that not only throw people out of work and treat their livelihoods as collateral damage but also make the investments that are needed to change the structures of your economy more expensive and out of reach. Inflation preparedness, as I’ve described it, de-emphasizes the blunt tool of monetary austerity. This means that you are freeing up space for things like a full employment policy, where if you invest in these essential areas, you would also be creating useful and decent jobs. And by having this form of public job creation, you would actually also again create public competition to private employers by offering the kind of labor conditions that are necessary for a dignified life. The right to a good and meaningful job becomes a real possibility. So, in that sense, if you put all of this together, it actually becomes a coherent program, also macroeconomically speaking.</p><p>And then in terms of the international dimension, what I’m arguing is that affordability is also a peace question. We see this very clearly with the Iran war. Working toward peace is actually working toward sustained affordability. Now, in terms of the international trade, what I’m arguing is to move beyond the dichotomy between nationalist protectionism and free-trade liberalism, and to have forms of managed trade that are organized in the interest of commodity-producing nations in the Global South, which are extremely vulnerable to commodity price swings, but also in the interest of working people around the world.</p></dd></dl></section><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/weber-interview-antifascist-economics-affordability?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-21T13:36:28.119Z</published><summary type="text">Key to a long-term solution to defeating the far right is an economic program that guarantees security to all, including the affordability of housing and other essential components of a dignified life, Isabella Weber tells Jacobin.</summary></entry><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/greens-polanski-zionism-palestine-labour</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/greens-polanski-zionism-palestine-labour"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/jpeg" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/543523442794.jpg"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/543523442794.jpg" medium="image" type="image/jpeg"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/543523442794.jpg"/><title type="text">The Green Party Will Regain Momentum if It Keeps Its Nerve</title><updated>2026-10-21T18:53:17.4388Z</updated><author><name>Daniel Finn</name></author><category label="Party Politics" term="Party Politics"/><category label="War and Imperialism" term="War and Imperialism"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><div><p>On October 8, the Green Party fell short in a parliamentary by-election for the London constituency of Holborn and St Pancras that had been triggered by the resignation of Keir Starmer. The by-election was always going to be a long shot for the Green leader Zack Polanski, who stood as the party’s candidate. The result, which saw Labour retain the seat, was broadly what you would have <a href="https://www.thetimes.com/uk/politics/article/zack-polanski-holborn-st-pancras-by-election-john-curtice-g25lgvd99">expected</a> from the current state of national opinion polls.</p><p>That hasn’t stopped much of the British media from proclaiming the outcome to have been a game-changing disaster for the Greens and Polanski in particular. Some prominent Green politicians have also launched a push to reverse the party’s left turn under Polanski and guide it back into their political comfort zone. A motion that Green members passed at their recent party conference about Israel and Zionism has become a rallying point for Polanski’s critics.</p><p>If the advocates of a more conventional and unthreatening approach to politics win out, the gains that the Greens have made over the last year will prove to be ephemeral. If the party can hold its collective nerve, there will be new opportunities to win support as the contradictions of Andy Burnham’s political platform reveal themselves in practice.</p></div><section id="sec-1"><header><h2>From Starmer to Burnham</h2></header><div><p>Zack Polanski became the leader of the English and Welsh Greens in August 2025 with resounding support from party members for his “eco-populist” agenda. At the time, Polanski’s leadership campaign was one of two projects that sought to capitalize on disillusionment with the Labour Party. The new Green leader declared his <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2025/jul/25/zack-polanski-green-party-alliance-jeremy-corbyn-zarah-sultana-new-party">willingness</a> to cooperate with the new left-wing party that Jeremy Corbyn and his allies were planning to launch in the next few months.</p><p>In the best-case scenario for the British left, the parallel projects would have proved to be complementary. But there was a huge gap between the objective potential of the situation and the subjective readiness of Your Party’s founding team to exploit it. A faction fight between rival camps grouped around Corbyn and Zarah Sultana dominated the first months of the new party’s existence, while the enthusiasm of the previous summer gradually drained away. During a period of unprecedented volatility in British politics, Your Party proved to be much less than the sum of its parts.</p><p>While all of this was happening, Polanski and his allies pressed ahead with their own project, and they made some very significant political gains at Labour’s expense during the first half of this year. In February, Hannah Spencer delivered the first ever Green by-election victory in the Manchester constituency of Gorton and Denton after a three-way contest with Labour and Reform, the hard-right party led by Nigel Farage. Labour sources <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2026/feb/27/labour-worst-fears-realised-greens-victory-gorton-denton-byelection">explicitly</a> <a href="https://www.ft.com/content/a1b744aa-db7c-47a4-b0aa-da23872a20e9?syn-25a6b1a6=1">stated</a> that they would have preferred Reform to win the seat, because Spencer’s breakthrough showed that progressive voters no longer felt obliged to support Labour.</p><p>Popular anger at the genocide in Gaza and Starmer’s <a href="https://www.lbc.co.uk/article/sir-keir-starmer-hamas-terrorism-israel-defend-itself-DWzhBf_2/">endorsement</a> of Israeli war crimes was an important factor behind disillusionment with Labour. Polanski and the Greens explicitly charged Israel with genocide and strongly opposed the ban on Palestine Action that resulted in hundreds of peaceful <a href="https://news.sky.com/story/terrorism-arrests-soar-by-660-after-palestine-action-ban-13485097">protesters</a> being arrested and charged with terrorism. The fact that Polanski himself was Jewish merely added to the fury of his critics, who had grown accustomed to branding the Palestine solidarity movement as a putrid cesspool of antisemitism.</p><p>The local elections in May represented another big step forward for Polanski’s party, which now overtook Labour in terms of projected <a href="https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/ce8p4yn448vo">vote share</a>. For every English vote that Labour lost to Reform, it lost <a href="https://yougov.com/en-gb/articles/54811-labours-voter-coalition-broke-more-to-left-than-right-at-2026-local-elections">nearly four</a> to the Greens. The Greens in Scotland have a separate organization with its own leadership team, but Polanski <a href="https://www.holyrood.com/news/view,zack-polanski-outrageous-that-proindependence-parliament-would-not-secure-referendum">joined them</a> on the campaign trail before they achieved their highest ever vote for the Scottish Parliament. The election results prompted a dramatic change of approach from the Labour Party, at least in terms of style and presentation.</p><p>Under Starmer’s leadership, Labour treated left-wing voters with undisguised contempt and sought to <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2026/mar/01/shabana-mahmood-to-limit-refugees-to-30-months-in-uk">compete</a> with Reform on its chosen political ground. After Starmer’s meltdown, Labour turned to the Manchester mayor, Andy Burnham, as his replacement. Burnham was the most high-profile Labour politician who was not tainted by association with the Starmer project. He brought with him a new kind of rhetoric that contrasted sharply with the familiar tropes of Starmerism.</p><p>Starmer had <a href="https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/2023/12/02/voters-have-been-betrayed-on-brexit-and-immigration/">praised</a> Margaret Thatcher for “setting loose our natural entrepreneurialism.” Burnham now declared his <a href="https://www.cityam.com/burnham-calls-for-uk-to-abandon-40-years-of-neoliberalism/">belief</a> that Britain had spent “forty years on the wrong path” since Thatcher’s neoliberal Great Leap Forward. He <a href="https://www.gov.uk/government/speeches/andy-burnhams-first-speech-as-prime-minister-20-july-2026">promised</a> that his government would be a “circuit breaker,” working to establish “a new political model and a new economic model.”</p><p>There was also a clear discursive shift in relation to Palestine, with Burnham’s Foreign Secretary Ed Miliband taking the lead. His <a href="https://labour.org.uk/updates/stories/ed-milibands-speech-to-labour-party-conference-2026/">comments</a> at this year’s Labour conference reflected the pressure of the solidarity movement, including its impact on the field of electoral politics:</p><blockquote><p>We call out ethnic cleansing by the settler terrorists in the West Bank. We call out the evidence of war crimes in Gaza. We call out Israel’s illegal occupation of Palestine. And we match words with actions. We will ban the import of goods from illegal settlements. We will disrupt the supply lines of British finance, British construction, and British services for illegal settlements.</p></blockquote></div></section><section id="sec-2"><header><h2>Surrendering on Day One</h2></header><div><p>If we look beyond the rhetoric, the substance of Burnham’s new regime doesn’t measure up to his sales pitch. When he announced his first cabinet, he reappointed ministers like Pat McFadden, an influential figure who wants to <a href="https://www.thetimes.com/uk/welfare-inquiry/article/pat-mcfadden-work-and-pensions-welfare-benefits-n805pxwp5">roll back</a> what is left of Britain’s welfare state and shares Tony Blair’s <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2026/jun/01/mandelson-files-reveal-labour-party-riddled-with-doubts-infighting">conviction</a> that Labour should abandon its goal of phasing out fossil fuels by 2050.</p><p>John McTernan, an unapologetic Blairite who nonetheless seems to recognize that Britain has changed radically since 1997, <a href="https://tribunemag.co.uk/2026/07/andy-burnhams-easy-choice">urged</a> Burnham to defy a <a href="https://www.thetimes.com/uk/politics/article/ed-miliband-chancellor-risks-market-revolt-andy-burnham-warned-jm20v9flx">critical chorus</a> by nominating Ed Miliband as his chancellor: “The journey of ending neoliberalism starts with one appointment.” For McTernan, shirking this “easy choice” would mean “surrendering, on day one, to economic orthodoxy and conceding to those who oppose your fundamental agenda.” Burnham disregarded his advice and surrendered to orthodoxy by selecting John Healey instead.</p><p>There is also a big gap between language and policy when it comes to Israel. Miliband has <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/world/2026/sep/08/ed-miliband-overturned-decades-foreign-office-inertia-illegal-israeli-settlements">ruled out</a> applying any sanctions to Israel as a whole and condemned the Boycott, Divestment, and Sanctions movement. But the “illegal settlements” are in no way external to the Israeli state. The overwhelming consensus of the Israeli political class defines those settlements as an integral part of Israel itself.</p><p>Moreover, the war crimes Miliband correctly identifies in Gaza were obviously not the work of “settler terrorists.” It was the regular armed forces that turned Gaza into a charnel house. Since Miliband delivered his conference speech, the British government has capitulated to Israel over the order to evacuate the British consulate in East Jerusalem. According to the <a href="https://www.middleeasteye.net/opinion/why-uk-capitulated-israel-consulate-surrender-deal">reporting</a> of Peter Oborne, this act of surrender was a victory for Burnham’s national security adviser, Jonathan Powell, who successfully imposed his line on the foreign secretary.</p><p>The selection of ministers and advisers who are deeply committed to the economic status quo and Britain’s traditional role in world affairs gives us a much better sense of what Burnham’s project is going to deliver than his speechmaking. But we have to recognize that most voters won’t be paying close attention to the details of his appointments. For now, his <a href="https://labour.org.uk/updates/stories/andy-burnhams-speech-to-labour-party-conference-2026/">language</a> about “the break we are making with the flawed thinking of the last forty years” clearly does appeal to a section of Labour’s target electorate.</p><p>Even if Burnham was deadly serious about his stated goals, it would not be possible to reverse four decades of economic policy in the space of a few months. Many people will be inclined to wait and see if he can deliver on his promises, especially when Labour still seems to offer the best chance of blocking a government led by Reform. In the month of the Gorton and Denton by-election, the average polling gap between Labour and the Greens was less than 5 percent. By September, it was almost 15 percent.</p><p>In itself, this is enough to <a href="https://www.survation.com/what-happened-in-holborn-st-pancras/">explain</a> the outcome in Holborn and St Pancras. If Polanski had run for the constituency when Starmer was still the Labour leader, he would probably have won — but in that scenario, of course, there never would have been a by-election in the first place. To some extent, Polanski and the Greens have been victims of their own success. By forcing Labour to hold out the promise of a genuinely transformative agenda, they have inadvertently reduced the political space available to them, at least temporarily.</p><p>Under these circumstances, the best course of action would be to remain patient, avoid panicking, and look for opportunities to expose the gap between Burnham’s rhetoric and the substance of his policies. If it were up to Polanski alone, or the members who voted for him, this would surely have been the main line of argument from the Greens as they sought to move on from the by-election defeat. But the result in Holborn and St Pancras supplied an opening for Green politicians who never wanted the party to challenge Labour from the left in the first place.</p></div></section><section id="sec-3"><header><h2>Eco-centrism</h2></header><div><p>It would be a mistake to speak about the right wing of the Green Party as if it were merely a smaller version of Labour’s dominant faction, since the two organizations have very different relationships with the British state and the capitalist class. As things stand, there is no Green counterpart of Peter Mandelson, who was passing on <a href="https://www.newyorker.com/news/the-financial-page/the-jeffrey-epstein-files-are-peter-mandelsons-final-disgrace">information</a> about the Labour government’s economic plans to his friend Jeffrey Epstein while serving as a cabinet minister. Nor is there a Green version of Tom Watson, Labour’s deputy leader under Corbyn, who has recently taken up a job as a <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2026/sep/24/tom-watson-palantir-uk-politics">lobbyist</a> for Palantir.</p><p>At the same time, there are clear ideological differences within the Green Party that were on display during the 2025 leadership campaign. Polanski defeated a joint ticket comprising two of the Green MPs elected the previous year, Adrian Ramsay and Ellie Chowns. A <cite>New Statesman</cite> <a href="https://www.newstatesman.com/the-weekend-interview/2025/06/adrian-ramsay-ellie-chowns-interview-meet-eco-centrists-fighting-to-run-green-party">profile</a> described Ramsay and Chowns, without any hint of malice, as “eco-centrists.” Ramsay claimed that Polanski’s approach would alienate more potential supporters than it gained, while Chowns <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2025/jul/30/green-party-leadership-vote-polanski-polarising-ramsay-chowns-interview">insisted</a> that the Greens were “way past those kinds of old ideas of politics being binary, left and right.”</p><p>There is no reason to think that the experience of the last year has prompted them to rethink their basic political outlook. When Ramsay <a href="https://www.newstatesman.com/politics/uk-politics/2026/10/former-green-leader-i-am-deeply-upset-by-zionism-vote">spoke</a> recently about the need for his party to establish “a broad base of support,” it was more than a platitude. He would like the Greens to position themselves as an ecological version of the Liberal Democrats instead of competing aggressively with Labour for urban left-wing voters. This is a recipe for being all things to all people and nothing much to anyone in particular.</p><p>It is important to note here that Ramsay and Chowns are Westminster MPs, while Polanski and the two Green deputy leaders elected alongside him are not (Polanski is a member of the London Assembly; Mothin Ali and Rachel Millward are local councilors). No matter how democratic a party constitution may be, elected representatives still occupy the key positions of influence, with MPs at the top of the hierarchy.</p><p>There was a spectacular <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2026/mar/14/green-party-membership-boom">increase</a> in party membership after Polanski took the reins, from 66,000 in September 2025 to 215,000 by the following spring. However, as the examples of Labour and the Scottish National Party from the last decade show, an influx of new members will not change a party unless there is a wider transformation of its program and personnel.</p></div></section><section id="sec-4"><header><h2>Nice to Be Nice</h2></header><div><p>Caroline Lucas, who was the first and only Green MP between 2010 and 2024, <a href="https://www.reddit.com/r/UKGreens/comments/1klmg7e/caroline_lucas_endorses_adrian_ramsayellie_chowns/">endorsed</a> the unsuccessful leadership ticket of Ramsay and Chowns. On the eve of the English local elections this year, Lucas issued a <a href="https://x.com/CarolineLucas/status/2051641209458667895?s=20">statement</a> that generated the following <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2026/may/05/greens-must-take-immediate-action-against-antisemitism-in-party-says-lucas">headline</a> in the <cite>Guardian</cite>: “Greens must take immediate action against antisemitism in party, says Lucas.” She seemed to be <a href="https://www.politicshome.com/news/article/caroline-lucas-greens-really-burnt-progressive-alliances-labour">very pleased</a> with the results of her handiwork: “I felt that it needed to be said . . . I hadn’t seen it being said in quite those terms.”</p><p>You don’t have to be an expert in codebreaking to decipher the criticism of Polanski that Lucas was putting forward here. If it were simply a question of stating that prejudice against Jews has no place in the Green Party, there would have been no need for Lucas to stick her oar in, since Polanski has made that point over and over again. She clearly felt that the current leadership was being much too combative in its response to allegations of antisemitism instead of taking them at face value.</p><p>We can find a good example of what those allegations really amounted to in another <cite>Guardian</cite> <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2026/apr/20/steve-reed-greens-labour-activists-expelled-antisemitism-reform-farage-trump">article</a> published during the election campaign. The Labour politician Steve Reed claimed that Polanski had opened the floodgates to antisemitism: “Some of the worst antisemites that we kicked out of the Labour Party not only joined the Green Party, but are now standing for the Green Party.”</p><p>Remarkably, the <cite>Guardian</cite> did not ask Reed to identify any of the Green election candidates he had in mind. It would have been very easy to check whether he was telling the truth about “the people that the Labour Party kicked out for being antisemites” if he had supplied a list of names, or even a single name. One can only assume that Reed chose not to offer any concrete examples because he knew that it would have undermined his case instead of bolstering it.</p><p>A Green spokesperson contemptuously dismissed the accusations that Reed made against their party: “Bad-faith attacks are all Labour has left.” Long experience shows that this is the only principled and pragmatic way of dealing with people who lie about antisemitism as casually as they breathe. Caroline Lucas would no doubt have preferred a meek and deferential response, promising to do better. Her style of politics relies heavily on a politically structured understanding of niceness that will always leave her exposed to the stratagems of a charlatan like Reed.</p></div></section><section id="sec-5"><header><h2>Defining Zionism</h2></header><div><p>This episode was a foretaste of the much more virulent controversy over a <a href="https://archiewoodrow.substack.com/p/motion-e02-zionism-is-racism-whats">motion</a> passed at this year’s Green conference that defined Zionism as “a political ideology which called for the creation — and, now it exists, the continuity — of an ethnonationalist Jewish State in historic Palestine to the exclusion and/or domination of the non-Jewish population.” The motion also expressed support for “the establishment of a single democratic Palestinian State in all of historic Palestine with Jerusalem as its capital, equal rights for all, and the right of return for Palestinians and their descendants.”</p><p>These were the main aspects of the policy statement that provoked the ire of British media commentators. Surprisingly perhaps, few seem to have picked up on another clause that affirmed the legitimacy of Palestinian resistance to Israeli occupation “by all available means under international law.” <cite>Guardian</cite> pundit Jonathan Freedland did highlight this aspect of the motion, <a href="https://x.com/TheNewsAgents/status/2107138496645185794">claiming</a> that the Green policy was “more extreme than mainstream Palestinian opinion — they’re saying violence is now legitimate.”</p><p>In reality, Palestinian support for armed struggle has <a href="https://www.pcpsr.org/en/node/1014">fluctuated</a> over the past three years, from a high point of 63 percent in December 2023 to a low point of 27 percent in August this year. This does not mean that Palestinians have changed their mind about the moral legitimacy of violence. It is a tactical debate about what methods are likely to prove most effective. The Green motion does not say that Palestinians should or must take up arms against the Israeli occupation forces — it merely defends their right to do so if they consider it to be the wisest course of action.</p><p>Green politicians such as Caroline Lucas objected to defining Zionism as a racist ideology, but their arguments were unconvincing and inconsistent. At first, Lucas <a href="https://www.politicshome.com/news/article/caroline-lucas-greens-really-burnt-progressive-alliances-labour">objected</a> on the grounds that “Zionism can be interpreted in so many different ways,” as if theoretical versions of Zionism that have never had any political impact should be given the same weight as the <a href="https://www.lrb.co.uk/the-paper/v41/n09/adam-shatz/trump-s-america-netanyahu-s-israel">actually existing</a> Zionism of the Israeli state from the Nakba to the present day.</p><p>During the conference, she changed tack by <a href="https://www.instagram.com/p/DeGpu7-FAaZ/?img_index=4">suggesting</a> that Zionism was “both racist AND a response to racism” against European Jews. Having acknowledged that for Palestinians, “Zionism was and remains a violent settler-colonial project, exclusionary and yes, racist,” Lucas then <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2026/oct/09/leader-of-jewish-greens-calls-for-zack-polanski-to-resign">reverted</a> back to her original line about the irreducible plurality of Zionism after the motion was passed: “It tries to have a singular definition of Zionism when we know that there are many.”</p><p>Lucas also complained that the motion was “divisive.” This was hardly likely to persuade anyone who was not already in her camp, since any position the Greens adopt in relation to Palestine is bound to be divisive. The real question is whether it draws the line of division in the right place.</p></div></section><section id="sec-6"><header><h2>Paddling Pools</h2></header><div><p>If Lucas and her allies had a stronger grounding in the politics of Palestine solidarity, they might have developed some more convincing arguments. For example, instead of claiming that it is impossible to define the core tenets of Zionism, it would be more useful to ask whether this is the most effective line of attack for a political party. The evidence of the past few weeks suggests that supporters of Israel are only too glad to spend their time on hairsplitting debates about the possible meanings of Zionism.</p><p>Let’s return for a moment to Jonathan Freedland, who has spent much of his career pretending to feel sad about the oppression of the Palestinians while relentlessly defaming anyone who proposes to do something about it. Freedland was evidently delighted to have the opportunity to splash around in this paddling pool of discourse — much safer than venturing into deep waters, where he might have to speak about the material realities of what the Zionist state-building project has involved for the Palestinian people. In a characteristically vicious <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2026/oct/02/green-party-anti-zionism-motion-attempt-tell-jews-how-to-think">column</a>, Freedland managed to compare the Greens to the Spanish Inquisition — any echo of Monty Python was presumably unintentional — without offering so much as a sideways glance at the Nakba.</p><p>There will always be chancers like Freedland clogging up the public sphere with their disingenuous talking points. The issue is whether focusing on the correct definition of Zionism is the best way to put them on the back foot. Freedland and his ideological peers can spin their wheels from here to eternity talking about how Zionism “means different things to different people.” They will be much less comfortable making the same argument about the Balfour Declaration, the Deir Yassin massacre, or the destruction of Gaza’s health care system.</p><p>A similar point applies to the motion’s call for a “single democratic Palestinian state in all of historic Palestine.” This is an entirely legitimate goal, and there should be no question of imposing a two-state model based on the 1967 border as the only acceptable framework. However, it is not essential for a political party in Britain to adopt its own programmatic view of what the final outcome should be, so long as it supports the right of the Palestinian people to self-determination.</p><p>Britain’s Palestine Solidarity Campaign (PSC) issued a <a href="https://palestinecampaign.org/solidarity-with-the-green-party-and-its-members/">statement</a> that strongly defended the Green Party and its members from a wave of attacks after the motion was passed. In the course of doing so, the PSC carefully noted that its own position is one of principled agnosticism: “Our longstanding policy, shaped in dialogue with our Palestinian partners, is that it is for the Palestinian people as a whole, rather than the solidarity movement in Britain, to decide what form Palestinian self-determination should take.” There was a proposed <a href="https://archiewoodrow.substack.com/p/motion-e02-zionism-is-racism-whats">amendment</a> to the motion that would have taken the same basic line, but it did not receive enough votes to pass.</p></div></section><section id="sec-7"><header><h2>Red Lines</h2></header><div><p>It is perfectly normal and healthy to have tactical discussions about the best way to formulate arguments and weaken the pro-Israel bloc in British politics. But it is a very different matter to present the ideas in the conference motion as if they were fundamentally illegitimate for a mainstream political party. That is precisely what figures like Adrian Ramsay and Caroline Lucas did after the vote.</p><p>Ramsay said that he was “deeply upset” about the motion and <a href="https://www.newstatesman.com/politics/uk-politics/2026/10/former-green-leader-i-am-deeply-upset-by-zionism-vote">implied</a> that Jewish people had reason to feel threatened by it, while Lucas <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2026/oct/09/leader-of-jewish-greens-calls-for-zack-polanski-to-resign">claimed</a> that it was “dangerous.” She appeared to be particularly concerned about the call for a single state in historic Palestine: “Supporting a motion which effectively denies Israel’s right to exist crosses a very significant red line.”</p><p>It would be interesting to ask Lucas for a detailed account of why she thinks the motion crossed “a very significant red line.” Is it a matter of principle for her that Israel must always continue to exist within its pre-1967 boundaries? That version of a two-state model would give Israel almost four-fifths of the territory of historic Palestine. The Oslo accords collapsed because that still wasn’t enough for Israel’s leaders: from Ehud Barak to Benjamin Netanyahu, they have all insisted on grabbing more of the remaining 22 percent.</p><p>In principle, one could support the idea of a two-state model while insisting that historic Palestine should be evenly divided between Israelis and Palestinians. After all, there has never been a single day since 1967 when Israel treated the so-called Green Line as if it were a permanent boundary, so the idea that Palestinians must always do so has neither logic nor justice on its side.</p><p>The most likely explanation is that Lucas hadn’t thought very much about the precise rationale for her “very significant red line.” Her main priority was to indicate to the British media that she strongly disapproved of the motion, because the commentariat was furious about it. The predictable effect of her intervention was to invite further attacks.</p></div></section><section id="sec-8"><header><h2>The Bottom of the Barrel</h2></header><div><p>The bias of the Tory press goes without saying, not to mention its unconcealed <a href="https://jewishgreens.greenparty.org.uk/2026/10/11/joint-statement-from-muslim-greens-and-jewish-greens-condemning-islamophobia-antisemitism-and-anti-palestinian-racism-in-the-daily-telegraph/">racism</a>, so let’s turn to the liberal end of the media marketplace. The <cite>Observer</cite> published a <a href="https://observer.co.uk/news/politics/article/greens-face-existential-threat-as-membership-plummets-after-anti-zionist-motion">story</a> that set aside any claim to journalistic credibility for the sake of ideological warfare, with the headline “Greens face ‘existential threat’ as membership plummets after anti-Zionist motion.”</p><p>On closer inspection, the claim about members leaving in droves relied upon a single piece of data: “One local party has seen a two-point drop in membership since last Sunday, with similar falls reported in other areas. If this were replicated across the country, it would mean 4,400 people had resigned.” Even if this exercise in speculative statistics proved to be accurate, it would mean that the Green membership was well over three times higher than it had been before Polanski took over.</p><p>Scraping the very bottom of the barrel, the author of the piece, Rachel Sylvester, turned to Ian Austin for a hostile quote: “They’re zealots, they’re extremists and they’re obsessed . . . you win elections by being reasonable and pleasant.” Austin himself is one of the most unreasonable and unpleasant individuals you will find in British politics, a swivel-eyed <a href="https://www.thenational.scot/news/19461477.ian-austin-faces-racism-claims-palestine-ben-jerrys-tweet/">extremist</a> who categorically <a href="https://www.middleeastmonitor.com/20240209-former-labour-mp-says-israel-not-responsible-for-crisis-in-gaza/">denies</a> that Israel bears <a href="https://www.politicshome.com/opinion/article/foolish-to-sever-trade-with-israel">any responsibility</a> for the carnage in Gaza.</p><p>This former Labour MP never has to worry about facing the voters again, because Boris Johnson gave him a peerage after he campaigned for a Tory victory in the 2019 general election. Andy Burnham decided to <a href="https://www.thenational.scot/news/26417352.andy-burnham-sparks-anger-israel-trade-envoy-appointment/">keep Austin</a> in his post as the UK trade envoy to Israel — a post that he has <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2025/may/28/uk-trade-envoy-lord-austin-visit-israel-talks-suspended-sparks-criticism">previously used</a> to encourage a sense of impunity among Israeli government officials.</p><p>Burnham himself seized the opportunity to go on the offensive against the Green Party, claiming that the conference motion was antisemitic and ruling out any coalition with the Greens at Westminster. Polanski hit back hard with the following statement: “I’m the only Jewish leader of a political party. I’m a victim of antisemitism every day and I’ve made it clear Jewish people are welcome in my party. You’re a prime minister who arms a genocide and locks up pensioners for opposing it.”</p><p>The Green Party leader responded in similar terms when the Labour politician Bridget Phillipson <a href="https://www.newstatesman.com/politics/uk-politics/2026/10/andy-burnhams-ultimatum-to-the-greens-has-changed-everything">issued</a> an edict to Labour councilors around the country, telling them they must break off governing pacts with their Green counterparts unless they explicitly denounce the motion: “Antisemitism is serious. That’s precisely why it should never be weaponised as a political football.”</p></div></section><section id="sec-9"><header><h2>A War on Children</h2></header><div><p>This is the right basis on which to hold the line against Labour, a party that has absolutely no standing to issue certificates of moral legitimacy. As Tom Blackburn has <a href="https://tribunemag.co.uk/2026/10/burnham-is-attacking-local-councils-to-defend-israel">argued</a>, capitulation to Burham’s demands would be futile as well as unprincipled: “Were the Greens to renounce Zionism is Racism, the goalposts would be shifted once again, and they would be placed at the centre of some other concocted crisis.” The aim is to tilt the <a href="https://fromarsetoelbow.blogspot.com/2026/10/the-representation-of-people.html">balance of forces</a> inside the Green Party so that it no longer poses any threat to Labour.</p><p>In the midst of this contrived hysteria, the <cite>Guardian</cite> published an <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2026/oct/07/7-october-attacks-anniversary-antisemitism-britain">article</a> by Dave Rich of the Community Security Trust that put the attacks on the Green Party in their proper perspective. Rich set out to demonize everyone who acknowledges the <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/world/2024/apr/02/gaza-palestinian-children-killed-idf-israel-war">overwhelming</a> <a href="https://www.nytimes.com/interactive/2024/10/09/opinion/gaza-doctor-interviews.html">evidence</a> that Israel has been deliberately targeting children in Gaza:</p><blockquote><p>Without doubt, it is deeply upsetting that thousands of Palestinian children have been killed in Gaza, and many feel that Israel could have done more to minimise civilian casualties. But to describe this not as the result of a tragic and unbearable conflict, but as a “war on children,” is to imply that killing children is the whole point: a charge that echoes the medieval blood libel. From that assumption to Jihad al-Shamie yelling: “This is what you get for killing our children” as he tried to batter down the doors of Heaton Park synagogue last Yom Kippur is not as big a leap as some might wish.</p></blockquote><p>For Rich, the only acceptable response when an Israeli sniper carefully aims his rifle before <a href="https://www.middleeasteye.net/news/uk-middle-east-minister-dismissed-gaza-genocide-concerns-obnoxious">shooting a child</a> in the head and chest is to wring one’s hands ineffectually about the “tragic and unbearable conflict.” He smears and slanders everybody who expresses outrage about such crimes by associating them with the man who attacked a Manchester synagogue last year, killing two people.</p><p>No matter how brazenly he <a href="https://everydayhate.substack.com/p/mayoral-missteps">denies</a> the evidence of Israel’s genocide, Rich will never lose his status as a legitimate figure in the eyes of the British media. The Community Security Trust, a body that <a href="https://www.middleeasteye.net/news/uk-antisemitism-monitor-inside-police-operations-room-during-gaza-war-protests">works closely</a> with the British state and its police forces, will not face any pressure to distance itself from his morally repugnant views. These are the standards of the British political mainstream, whose gatekeepers now presume to exclude the Green Party from their most exalted company.</p></div></section><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/greens-polanski-zionism-palestine-labour?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-21T13:05:08.18Z</published><summary type="text">Zack Polanski’s leadership of the Green Party is facing its biggest challenge to date. But the Greens can weather the storm if they stand their ground against deceitful attacks from Andy Burnham’s Labour government over their solidarity with Palestine.</summary></entry><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/canada-logistics-walmart-union-contract</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/canada-logistics-walmart-union-contract"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/jpeg" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/650658510814.jpg"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/650658510814.jpg" medium="image" type="image/jpeg"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/650658510814.jpg"/><title type="text">How a Canadian Union Finally Bested Walmart</title><updated>2026-10-20T18:26:49.702933Z</updated><author><name>Benjamin Y. Fong</name></author><category label="Strategy" term="Strategy"/><category label="Unions" term="Unions"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><div><p>In our <a href="https://www.versobooks.com/products/3460-hyperpolitics?srsltid=AfmBOooYsXuERb-4tvMLUrRkG7vURwLF4ts2zQVykBncpCSYIk8YxXD8">hyperpolitical age</a>, when mass protests come and go without much clear sense of what was won or lost, the strategies of social movements can seem quixotic, their benchmarks of success fuzzy. In the union world, however, success or failure can be measured in more cut-and-dried terms: by the ratification of a union contract. A contract between a union and an employer does not simply lay out the terms of employment at a particular worksite. It is also a symbol of the begrudging respect that an employer has for the collective organization of its employees.</p><p>Until this year, Walmart had not put pen to paper on a union contract in Canada or the United States. As the largest employer in North America (with a headcount of 1.6 million in the US alone, it is still larger than Amazon) and with annual gross profits last year of $171 billion, Walmart has tremendous resources with which to fight off unions, and has developed a sophisticated <a href="https://lithub.com/a-brief-history-of-the-attempts-to-unionize-walmart/">playbook</a> for doing so. It is not surprising that the company that labor historian Nelson Lichtenstein has <a href="https://thenewpress.org/books/wal-mart/">called</a> the “template organization” of neoliberal capitalism should have been, for most of its existence, an impenetrable anti-union fortress.</p><p>This is why we should appreciate the weight of some recent news from Canada’s warehousing sector: on May 7, 2026, eight hundred workers at a Walmart Regional Distribution Center in Mississauga, Ontario (in the greater Toronto area), won a two-year contract after certifying their union with Unifor Local 252 in 2024. Though it has received relatively little coverage in the left-labor world, it is a truly historic victory, and a story that ought to be studied for its broader implications. No union gets a contract with a company as imposing as Walmart without there being lessons for organized labor to take from the strategy, tactics, and conditions that enabled the victory. The lumbering corporate retail giant that has for so long set the industry standard for working conditions has finally conceded to the union. Why now?</p></div><section id="sec-1"><header><h2>Certification for Mississauga</h2></header><div><p>Before Unifor won in Mississauga in 2024, there had only been two prior union certifications — official government recognition that a group of workers is represented by a given union, creating a legal obligation to bargain — at Walmart facilities in Canada. One was at a store in Windsor, Ontario, in 1996 with the United Steelworkers, and it was only certified by labor board order in 1997 due to Walmart’s <a href="https://onlabor.org/how-three-simple-labor-laws-helped-unions-organize-amazon-and-uber-in-canada/">serious</a> unfair labor practices during the election. The union never got a contract and was eventually decertified. The other was with the United Food and Commercial Workers (UFCW) in 2005 at a store in <a href="https://www.cbc.ca/news/business/wal-mart-to-close-unionized-quebec-store-1.554398">Jonquière, Quebec</a>, which Walmart closed just after the union requested binding arbitration from Quebec’s minister of labor. As will become important in this story, Quebec, the neighboring province to Ontario, has strong enough labor law that certification there will almost always result in a contract. This is the dynamic that led Amazon to <a href="https://jacobin.com/2025/01/amazon-quebec-union-busting-organizing">shutter</a> its entire operation in the province last year.</p><p>In the United States, the only successful election at a Walmart was in 2000, to unionize ten meat cutters at a Supercenter in Jacksonville, Texas. Days later, Walmart responded to what would otherwise have been minor news in rural East Texas by announcing that it was getting rid of <em>all</em> <a href="https://www.theglobalist.com/why-its-impossible-to-unionize-walmart/">meat cutting</a> in their Supercenters across the nation. In 2011, the UFCW attempted to organize the company as a whole with the multimillion dollar OUR Walmart campaign, organizing workers to engage in a wide variety of <a href="https://inthesetimes.com/article/the-walmart-black-friday-protests">actions</a>. Union elections, however, were not part of the mix, reflecting the recognition that the official path to unionization in the United States had been effectively blocked in cases where the employer was a corporation as well-resourced and with as much anti-union animus as Walmart. OUR Walmart had some notable wins, but the UFCW pulled <a href="https://inthesetimes.com/article/which-way-our-walmart">funding</a> from the campaign in 2015 when Marc Perrone assumed the presidency of the union.</p><p>I am less familiar with Walmart’s arrangements with unions in Mexico, but it appears that many of the contracts that Walmart has signed there are so-called <a href="https://en.archive.maquilasolidarity.org/sites/maquilasolidarity.org/files/MSN-Walmex-Report-2010-12.pdf">protection contracts</a>, i.e., a collective bargaining agreement made without the workers’ knowledge or consent. By claiming to represent workers, those contracts, often signed by politically connected unions, “protect” the employer from any efforts by its employees to bargain more aggressively. Many such contracts were <a href="https://onlabor.org/backgrounder-amlo-and-mexican-labor-law-reform/">targeted</a> by reforms promised by Andrés Manuel López Obrador­­ after he won the presidency in 2018. The next year, when the Revolutionary Confederation of Laborers and Farmworkers (CROC) planned a strike on a number of Walmart facilities, the company averted it with a 5.5 percent annual wage increase. But it is not clear that any <a href="https://mexiconewsdaily.com/news/walmart-says-wage-accord-ends-strike-threat/">new contract</a> was signed between Walmart and CROC as a result of the settlement.</p><p>So when Marty Gaouette, a worker in the shipping department at Walmart’s Mississauga Regional Distribution Center (RDC), reached out to Unifor Local 252 in December 2023 about the possibility of starting a union that would secure its gains through a legally binding contract, there was no real template in North America for doing so.</p><p>But there were plenty of worker frustrations. At the start of the Covid-19 pandemic, Walmart had temporarily offered a wage bump (“hero pay,” the company called it, as part of the broader pattern of pandemic wage increases in the in-person retail sector) and flexible working hours. As unemployment numbers climbed, however, Walmart understood it had a relatively captive workforce and reversed course, eliminating the wage bump after just six months. “It was like the worst thing that they could have done to us,” explained Rhaddy Que, a utility associate in the maintenance department and eventually a member of the workplace’s bargaining team. “We were committed to work, but [they were] taking those dollars away from us.”</p><p>Forced overtime was also a major issue. Unlike Amazon’s “mandatory extended time,” which is mostly enforced around holidays and Prime days, forced overtime became a year-round regularity in Mississauga, leaving workers with little control over their work-life balance. Speedup, in addition to longer hours, was increasingly an irritation. The Mississauga distribution center does what Walmart calls “store replenishment” — filling trucks destined for retail locations — and so has not traditionally been under the same management pressure as Amazon fulfillment centers, with their rapid delivery promises. But competitive pressure from Amazon has led Walmart to invest in its e-commerce capacity, offering last-mile delivery from its stores, and as it has done so, the need for greater and greater efficiency in replenishing inventory at Walmart stores has increased. Rodolfo “Tito” Pilozo, who was also on the Unifor bargaining team and works in receiving, says that the volume increase in the shipping department was what pushed Gaouette to contact the union. Management would say that they would have to process a certain number of cases of goods per hour, when in reality the amount was 10 percent more than announced.</p><p>Speed-up, forced overtime, clawed back wages and benefits offered during Covid: these were swirling in the well of worker frustration in late 2023. The organizing work went quickly at first. A number of workers at the facility had been working there more or less since 1994, when Walmart first came to Canada. Back then, the warehouse had been located in Brampton, a neighboring auto manufacturing town also part of the greater Toronto area. It had been owned and operated by a third-party company, Tibbett and Britten, though those working there understood it was a warehouse for Walmart. Many of the workers who would lead the organizing in Mississauga had been previously involved with a unionization effort with the Teamsters at the facility in Brampton in the late 1990s. Tibbett and Britten moved the operation to Mississauga in 2002, according to Pilozo, and Walmart took full control of it in 2014. It was workers like Pilozo, with a great amount of seniority, who formed the core of the organizing team.</p><p>Around April 2024, however, the organizing momentum slowed. Walmart’s captive audience meetings began to have an effect. “There was a lot of fear,” Que says about that moment. “They gave us that fear. We would have meetings, and they would just say how it’s not worth having a union. And that the company will do what the union is promising you.” Angela Drew Kimelman and Gary Rumboldt, the Unifor staff organizers assigned to the campaign, met with key worker organizers and they decided they were ready to make the campaign more visible. They formed “<a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8wrPJxb2jQw">Team Red</a>,” a group of workers who were willing to wear Unifor red to work on Wednesdays and who would leaflet outside the warehouse about the union. Unifor got so-called protection letters sent to Walmart on behalf of many of the organizing workers, which reminded the company that it was a violation of the rights of pro-union workers to be treated any differently than other workers. This gave Team Red the cover and confidence to organize publicly rather than in secret, as is often done in the early months of union drives.</p><p>Justin Gniposky, Unifor’s organizing director, credits the strength of the team for patiently building strong connections during this time:</p><blockquote><p>We had a really strong inside committee. They spent the time, did the work. . . .  Sometimes you don’t have that kind of structure on the inside, but these guys built that structure, they built it to succeed, and it showed. They had the respect of their co-workers, and respect’s one thing, but their co-workers also believed they had their best interests in mind. They had their trust to move through this.</p></blockquote><p>Part of building this trust lay in making sure that all union materials were translated into Punjabi, Tagalog, and Chinese. It also lay in getting workers who spoke these languages to reach out to other workers directly. This proved particularly important for getting the sizable part-time workforce on board with the union program. Most of the part-timers were international workers, some on temporary visas. Que estimated that even though at least 30–40 percent of those workers are no longer with Walmart, most of them supported the union when they were at the warehouse, despite many knowing they would not be around long enough to benefit from a contract.</p><p>The Mississauga workers voted for their union from September 10 to September 12, 2024. Participation was high, and the union <a href="https://www.canlii.org/en/on/onlrb/doc/2024/2024canlii96700/2024canlii96700.html">won</a> with a reported <a href="https://themilitant.com/2025/07/05/walmart-workers-in-ontario-win-union-press-fight-for-a-contract/">56 percent</a> majority. Que expressed the disbelief that many felt about the victory:</p><blockquote><p>We weren’t sure at all [that we were going to win]. It was sort of embedded in our heads that Walmart is anti-union. You heard a lot that it was impossible to have a union, and that Walmart will not allow it. That’s what they made us feel. But later on, we started to feel like there was more power in people wanting to have the union than in Walmart not wanting one.</p></blockquote></div></section><section id="sec-2"><header><h2>Stemming the Tide</h2></header><div><p>The day after Ontario certified the union to represent the Mississauga warehouse workers, Walmart issued an across-the-board <a href="https://www.walmartcanada.ca/news/2024/09/25/walmart-canada-announces-additional--92m-wage-investment-for-fro">wage increase</a> for every single logistics worker in Canada (warehouse workers and drivers both) — except for the eight hundred workers who had just unionized. As Gniposky summed it up, “Here’s the congratulations on getting a union. You are now making less than every single one of your coworkers.” Walmart also brought in workers from temp agencies to staff the Mississauga facility, signaling to the newly unionized workers that they could be easily replaced.</p><p>Meanwhile, Unifor had other battles to fight with the company. In October 2024, the month after the election victory in Ontario, 120 Walmart truck drivers in British Columbia won card check certification. Soon after, 280 Walmart truck drivers in Alberta did the same. Peter Pearce, a driver out of the Nisku, Alberta, depot and member of the bargaining team there, said that it was “favoritism, nepotism, and unfair treatment by certain supervisors” that led the Alberta drivers to organize for union representation. To stem the tide of pro-union sentiment across the company’s Canada operations, Walmart issued yet another across-the-board wage increase. This made for two unprecedented countrywide wage increases in the span of a month and half, but the company made the message of these wage increases clear with the workplaces it excluded — the Mississauga RDC workers and the two units of truck drivers.</p><p>Due to the particularities of Canadian labor law, the Mississauga warehouse workers’ and the western Canada truckers’ campaigns were run slightly differently. The warehouse workers petitioned for certification at the provincial level by the government of Ontario, while the drivers petitioned the federal government, as truck drivers <a href="https://www.trucknews.com/blogs/labour-code-changes-affect-rules-for-terminating-truck-drivers/">crossing</a> provincial or international borders are regulated federally. In Ontario, unions need 40 percent of workers to sign a union card before filing for an election, and a simple majority in an election to be certified. Federal elections are run by “card check,” meaning that a union need only get 50 percent plus one on cards to certify. Canadian labor law also has what is called a “<a href="https://join.unifor.org/the_freeze_provision_federal">freeze provision</a>,” which prevents employers from altering workers’ terms and conditions during a certification drive, including by withholding standard wage increases. As the wage increases and other retaliatory actions by Walmart clearly violated the freeze provision, Unifor filed unfair labor practice (ULP) charges at both the provincial and federal levels. The Ontario labor board delayed the decision on the union’s charges until after collective bargaining ended, but the federal ULP was settled in November 2025.</p><p>In the meantime, in May 2025, Walmart had sold off its Canada fleet service to a third party named Canada Cartage. This meant Unifor had to update its certification, which delayed negotiations, and Canada Cartage began a decertification drive. Pearce, the Alberta truck driver, described those negotiations as “extremely difficult.” The bargaining team pushed for a three-year contract, a 2.5 percent wage increase per year, and a limitation on “lease ops” subcontracting to no more than 10 percent of their work. Even though the federal labor board halted the decertification drive, as decertification is not allowed during active collective bargaining, Canada Cartage management did everything to slow things down. During the negotiations, the bargaining team got word that a sizable group of previously anti-union drivers in Calgary decided they now wanted the union to sign a sweetheart deal: a one-year contract, a 1.5 percent wage increase, and a lease ops limitation to 25 percent. “It made absolutely no sense,” Pearce said. “It scream[ed] of manipulation by management. ‘Please don’t give me extra money.’ I’ve never heard anybody say that.” The Unifor drivers eventually settled on a one-year collective agreement with Canada Cartage that expires in May 2027. But things ended quite differently for workers at the RDC across the country in Ontario.</p></div></section><section id="sec-3"><header><h2>First Contract</h2></header><div><p>Collective bargaining in Mississauga finally started in May 2025, eight months after a majority of the warehouse’s workers voted for Unifor representation, and the same month Walmart sold off its Canadian trucking operations to Canada Cartage. As is often the case with intransigent employers, Walmart offered Unifor only a few sporadic dates over the subsequent months when it would be available for negotiations. With longer deadline rules for negotiations than there are in Quebec, Walmart intended to drag out the Ontario process as long as possible.</p><p>Unifor’s bargaining team consisted of seven workers as well as Unifor’s national bargaining representative, Shayne Fields, and the longtime president of Local 252, Eamonn Clarke, who the year before had won a strike by four hundred workers at a plant owned by Nestlé. This team brought an intimidating amount of collective experience at Walmart. According to Pilozo,</p><blockquote><p>The good thing about our bargaining committee is that the people chosen were very senior people: twenty-nine, thirty, thirty-one, twenty-eight years with the company, and so on. When we first introduced each other, they [the Walmart negotiators] were very impressed. Their facial expressions showed that, “Wow, these guys have been there for a long time, almost since the beginning.” Even their lawyer was stunned.</p></blockquote><p>To negotiate, Walmart sent a delegation of nine company representatives. There was little indication that the company intended to bargain in good faith. According to a few of my interviewees, company management was actively supporting a decertification campaign, giving some anti-union workers special lockers in the building to hold decertification petitions and anti-union literature. Some workers who spoke out against the union got special treatment. Verbal altercations would break out, and at one point there was a physical fight between two employees, one pro- and the other anti-union, both of whom were suspended and later fired. According to Que, however, on the basis of Team Red’s inside connections, most workers understood these altercations to be a product of Walmart’s actions, not the union’s.</p><p>I asked everyone I interviewed for this story if there was ever a moment where it felt like negotiations shifted, where Walmart seemed to turn a corner and begin to negotiate in good faith. That moment never seemed to come for anyone. It seemed more that, unlike in the United States, there was a limit on just how long the company could drag out negotiations because in Ontario, Unifor had the right to apply for an arbitrated settlement if collective bargaining ran aground.</p><p>On May 7, 2026, a year after negotiations had officially begun, Walmart and Unifor announced they had reached an agreement. The resulting two-year contract was, by everyone’s account, not the “best” contract they could have gotten, but it was a meaningful one: wage parity with other warehouses; retroactive back pay for violating the freeze provision, in the form of a lump sum payment in the range of $4,000 to $9,000 per worker in July of this year; a “me too” clause preventing Walmart from raising wages elsewhere without raising wages in Mississauga, as they had done in the fall of 2024; planned wage raises in 2027 and 2028; a grievance procedure; and a limit on temporary workers. That last bit, according to Gniposky, got the biggest applause at the contract ratification meetings. The next day, Local 252’s Walmart members ratified the contract by a whopping 93 percent.</p><p>Que and Pilozo told me that management is slowly acclimating to the new environment. Pilozo said he corrected a manager the other day who was complaining to workers about “your” contract: “It’s <em>our</em> contract, because it was signed collectively by the employer and us.” The manager apologized on the spot. Que said the new grievance procedure is working well, and that communication between stewards and management has improved to the point where they only invoke it occasionally. When I was interviewing them for this story, the lump sum payment was just days away, and workers were giving knowing nods to each other around the warehouse. In Pilozo’s words, where tension had existed not so long ago, “you’re starting to see smiles.”</p></div></section><section id="sec-4"><header><h2>Location, Resources, Regulatory Constraint, Leadership</h2></header><div><p>“Workers at Walmart in the US and Canada have long made it clear that they want a union,” Nelson Lichtenstein told me. “To actually have a signed contract is a major breakthrough and something genuinely new when it comes to the largest private employer in North America.” Still, this story might seem a bit anticlimactic: big union wins are supposed to end in heroic confrontations before the company concedes. But no dramatic confrontation ensued here. Again, the billion dollar question is: Why was this the moment for Walmart to finally cave and sign a union contract? Are they getting soft in their old age, without Sam Walton’s infamous hatred of unions to guide the way?</p><p>I would boil down the key factors in this historic victory to four: location, resources, regulatory constraint, and leadership. First, the fact that this happened in Mississauga was no accident. “Mississauga is a hub for most of Ontario and Quebec,” Gniposky explained. “That facility is important. It’s not as easy for them to move.” The company regularly warned workers that a pro-union vote could lead the facility to shut down, but the threat was a weak one. For one, the facility was an RDC and not a store (unlike the location in Jonquière, which Walmart shut down after they won union certification), and, in the Walmart supply chain, the RDC is in a key staging ground for two of Canada’s major metro markets, Toronto and Montreal. Walmart doesn’t have distribution centers in Quebec — having already closed them allegedy on account of the province’s strong labor law — but that market is easily supplied from Mississauga.</p><p>Unlike the largest warehousing area in the United States, the sprawling Inland Empire in southern California, Canada’s primary <a href="https://ontheseams.substack.com/p/the-distribution-networks-of-canadas">warehousing cluster</a> is nestled in a narrow corridor of the west Toronto suburbs. Stretching from Mississauga to Brampton, it is constrained on all sides: to the south by Lake Ontario, the east by Toronto, the west by suburban residential development, and the north by lack of infrastructure (and eventually Lake Huron). In other words, it would be a huge pain for Walmart to relocate this RDC. Distribution centers are already more strategic organizing targets than stores, on account of the disruptive impact that labor can theoretically cause through their organization. But distribution centers that can’t easily be moved are ideal targets.</p><p>Choke point analysis — based on the idea that organized labor is going to be most successful at points in the production and distribution process where the disruptive impact of labor actions is relatively high — has a <a href="https://catalyst-journal.com/2023/12/john-womack-labor-power-and-strategy-review">mixed reputation</a> in the labor world. In part, this is because it involves the idea that some sites of work are more structurally important to a company’s operation than others, and thus that some workers’ struggles are more strategic or important than others. But when it comes to the contemporary logistical economy, in which the flow of commodities has increased in speed and efficiency but also fragility, and at a moment when labor is limited in the resources it can allocate to any organizing campaign, choke point analysis matters more than ever. Organized labor ignores it at its own peril.</p><p>None of this is to say that Walmart will not attempt to move the RDC in Mississauga. Unifor and the RDC workers are well aware of this, which is why Pilozo, Que, and their fellow members of Team Red have been leafleting at other Walmart distribution centers all over the western suburbs of Toronto, aiming to saturate the area with union drives to give Walmart no geographic out. When Mississauga workers had been excluded from the prior wage bumps, their plight served as a cautionary tale for other Walmart workers, who benefited from disengagement. But now that the Mississauga workers have a hefty lump sum of back pay and contractually guaranteed raises set for 2027 and 2028, Unifor can persuasively make the case that the Team Red workers at Mississauga have been setting the standard for warehouse workers throughout the entire region.</p><p>Second, this was not simply a scrappy, bottom-up drive. Unifor had invested serious resources into becoming Canada’s warehousing union. Gaouette reached out to Unifor because he had heard of the union’s <a href="https://www.unifor.org/campaigns/all-campaigns/warehouse-workers-unite">Warehouse Workers Unite</a> campaign, the fruit of its <a href="https://www.unifor.org/sites/default/files/documents/Warehouse%20Sector%20Profile_FINAL_December%202021LV2.pdf">strategic analysis</a> of the warehousing sector. Unifor was 100 percent committed to seeing the campaign through and leveraged the threat of arbitration, a costly and time-consuming process, as well as the combination of federal and provincial ULPs, to push the Mississauga campaign to the finish line. Note that the federal disclosure from the trucking negotiations hung over the provincial proceedings only because Unifor was willing to pursue Walmart on multiple fronts. This is the story of a committed group of trusted workplace leaders, but it is also one of a union with a long-term strategic vision and the will to back up that vision with resources.</p><p>Third, Unifor strategically used the constraints of Canadian labor law to make it so that Walmart ultimately had nowhere to go. This is the big difference between the Canadian and American contexts: especially now, when most of the gains of the Biden-era National Labor Relations Board have been reversed, it’s difficult to imagine even a very skillful union in the United States using ULPs and the lingering possibility of arbitration to push toward a contract, as Unifor did in this case. This is not to say, however, that the question of regulatory constraint is not applicable, simply that it must be asked differently: in New York City, for instance, the Delivery Protection Act under consideration by the city council could upset Amazon’s delivery driver subcontracting model, providing the conditions for major wage gains and organizing drives. In many states, and many more municipalities, ballot initiatives can be used to put such regulatory questions governing employment relationships directly before voters. Looking longingly over the border at Canadian regulatory constraint should be cause not for lamentation, but for creative approaches to improving the odds of union drives in the United States.</p><p>Finally, it’s overwhelmingly clear that the Mississauga RDC has a robust layer of trusted workplace leaders who not only bore an intimidating amount of collective work experience at Walmart and were committed to the union but also had the respect and trust of their colleagues to easily weather any storm that the company created. “Walmart saw that they weren’t going to be able to manipulate and turn these workers against each other,” Gniposky said. “Certainly there were anti-union people, as there are in any workplace, but they were a minority, and the majority was clearly on the side of their union. This was the strongest inside committee I’ve seen in my career.”</p><p>It’s notable that there were no strikes, walkouts, or even marches on the boss in this story. As Que explained, “We educated all our members and said, ‘Maybe the best thing would be to have a strike.’ But we didn’t have to to get this collective agreement done.” If a strike was what was needed, Team Red was prepared to make it happen, and, by all accounts, it would have had high, if not total, participation. But they were reluctant to go down that road. Most stories of successful first contract fights will not be so free of confrontational workplace actions, but they will certainly feature workplace leaders focused more on the resolution than the conflict — people who want to work, to put in the work, and to proudly wear a union shirt while doing so.</p></div></section><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/canada-logistics-walmart-union-contract?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-20T18:26:49.702933Z</published><summary type="text">Walmart has long stymied attempts to unionize any part of its business. Which is why the breakthrough union victory won by 800 workers at a Mississauga, Ontario regional distribution center is worth closely examining.</summary></entry><entry><id>https://jacobin.com/2026/10/review-gibney-documentary-musk</id><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/review-gibney-documentary-musk"/><link rel="enclosure" type="image/png" href="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/286389641416.png"/><media:content url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/286389641416.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/><media:thumbnail url="https://media.jacobin.com/images/2026/10/286389641416.png"/><title type="text">Even Musk Haters Will Hate Sitting Through Musk</title><updated>2026-10-20T17:20:20.947828Z</updated><author><name>Eileen Jones</name></author><category label="Film and TV" term="Film and TV"/><category label="Rich People" term="Rich People"/><content type="xhtml"><div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"><div><p>Always glad to see Elon Musk pummeled, of course, as he is in Alex Gibney’s documentary <cite>Musk</cite>, now playing in theaters. The film sounds the alarm over this right-wing trillionaire tech bastard, which can’t be done too early or too often. But there’s a problem when even I, a fervent, long-term Musk hater, get exhausted, then irritated, then fed up by this film long before its grueling four-hour running time is over.</p><p>For me, the burning question quickly became: Who is this film for? What’s the intended audience for this thing?</p><p>Gibney’s huge, heavy-handed disemboweling of Musk, clumsily wielding an axe rather than a scalpel, was immediately identified as “a hit piece that misses, and makes the fatal sin of being boring for 4 hours” by <a href="https://www.theguardian.com/technology/2026/sep/10/elon-musk-attacks-film-maker-behind-documentary-about-him">Musk himself</a>, warning off his obsessed fans, who’ll obviously be skipping the film. It’s an indication of Musk’s essential stupidity — his cluelessness about everything except how to generate profits, particularly off his own repeated business failures — that he keeps obsessively commenting on this film on social media, thus doing its publicity work for the PR team presumably getting paid to do the same job. Some curiosity-seekers with time to kill might head to the multiplex, thanks to the many free, self-defeating, Elon Musk–generated promo tweets.</p><p>The obvious audience for the film would seem to be the many who despise Musk. That’s a vast number of sane people: political leftists; the legions screwed over by him in business deals or working for him in thankless, underpaid jobs; those fired by the Department of Government Efficiency (DOGE) and those infuriated by the firings; the hapless car enthusiasts suckered into driving malfunctioning Teslas; and anyone who keeps up at all with Musk’s role in the latest sinister predations of the high-tech industry in league with right-wing governments around the world.</p><p>But consider that these are the people in the know, already aware of Musk’s harrowing South African childhood, early business failures that nevertheless made him huge profits, insidious credit-stealing takeover of the Tesla car company, SpaceX ventures, self-driving car and Twitter/X and DOGE debacles, appalling personal life, including the fathering of at least fourteen children by many different women in order to spread Musk seed around the world, and all the rest of it. These potential spectators are perhaps the least likely to feel the need to torture themselves with even more intimate knowledge of a man famous for the widespread repugnance inspired by his ideas, his rhetoric, his practices, and his bizarre physical self-presentation.</p><p>I personally feel I deserve a medal for having sat through <cite>Musk</cite>. Or at least a care package full of soothing home-spa products from a concerned citizens group.</p></div><section id="sec-1"><header><h2>Who Is This Four-Hour Takedown For?</h2></header><div><p>That leaves, as potential audience members, those who don’t know much about Elon Musk or are totally indifferent to him. And obviously those lucky, oblivious citizens aren’t going to create a rush of ticket-buying either.</p><p>Oh, and one other tiny group of possible <cite>Musk</cite>-watchers includes cinephiles who are always interested in what’s being done in the documentary form. They’re all flocking to see the <em>other</em> documentary that opened last week, Nathan Fielder and Lance Oppenheim’s <cite>You Can See Everything</cite>, a total wow of a film that’s drawing in crowds far beyond the size of the usual audience for documentaries. It took in about $15 million its first weekend; <cite>Musk</cite> made about $315,000 on more than four hundred screens.</p><p>But if some of those spectators go above and beyond the call of cinephile duty and watch <cite>Musk</cite> too, they’ll be depressed at best, and appalled at worst. It’s a sloppy job, <cite>Musk</cite>, reflecting a juvenile sensibility. It’s constantly presenting slapdash footage and recorded voices that aren’t identified or attributed to any source, and it’s loaded with what I guess must be Alex Gibney’s idea of infotainment stylings intended to make documentaries popular with the masses. Because Musk wouldn’t sit for an interview, for example, Gibney mined his interviews with other filmmakers and journalists and podcasters to digitally generate an AI avatar of Elon Musk who speaks as he might speak if he could be persuaded to speak to the filmmaker.</p><p>This is clearly Gibney’s idea of a big “gotcha” triumph, cleverly turning Musk’s massive AI investment against him. But really all it accomplishes is more misery for the half-dozen spectators in the theater, getting forcibly returned over and over to the bizarrely big-headed Musk avatar, made unaccountably handsomer than the actual golem-like real-life Musk, tricked out in leathers and enthroned in a gaming chair to deliver further inane commentary, such as musings on the possibility that we’re living in a simulation or that humans might turn out to be nothing more than “the biological bootloader” for digital superintelligence.</p></div></section><section id="sec-2"><header><h2>The <cite>Pew-Pew-Pew</cite> Gamer Style</h2></header><div><p>In general, Alex Gibney seems to have made an attempt at form-follows-function in creating a documentary that’s extremely Musk-like, resulting in an overall sense of slovenly gigantism that’s nevertheless unimpressive: a film as crude, outsize, erratic, and shambling as the man himself. For example, Gibney resorts to endless comic book and video game effects, favorite Musk pastimes, in order to present Musk’s rampage through the world. The first time we see a lengthy sequence involving first-person-shooter-style animation to represent Musk’s takeover of Twitter, blasting thousands of employees who actually know how the business runs, mass firings that help Musk turn a sometimes profitable company into a free-falling flop called X, it’s barely endurable. But then we have to watch the same extensive <em>pew-pew-pew</em> gamer massacres a second time, now with Musk’s notorious chainsaw repurposed as a firing weapon, to represent DOGE’s rampage through various US government buildings. It stands for the firing of legions of highly competent officials early in Donald Trump’s second term, before Musk had a spat with Trump and DOGE was shut down. By this point, it’s merely infuriating on too many levels to count.</p></div></section><section id="sec-3"><header><h2>Doomerism in Place of Politics</h2></header><div><p>The message of <cite>Musk</cite>, just to save you the trouble of actually sitting through the film, especially if you’re a leftist thinking that you <em>really ought</em> to go see it, is that it’s hopeless to resist Elon Musk’s fascist takeover. It’s already too late. Musk has amassed so much wealth, accrued so much political influence among the worst of the worst of global leaders, and created such extensive surveillance systems worldwide, the only thing to do is wait for him to officially declare himself as a comic-book supervillain come to life, having finally achieved world dominance, and probably called something stupid like GreatX, Overlord of the Galaxy.</p><p>And the attitude Gibney adopts — gloating over our guaranteed collective doom — serves the lunatic right, the fascist Musk-lovers of the world, very well. Why bother organizing when we’re all going to die?</p><p><cite>Musk</cite> starts and ends with the sublime imagery of outer space, which is promptly despoiled by Elon Musk and his imagined colonization of all of it (“I want to die on Mars,” he once mused), which began with SpaceX, represented in <cite>Musk</cite> as his most successful company in spite of all those crashing rockets. If the film succeeds in its mission to induce widespread cynical despair, you’ll be thinking the human race needs to end if only to prevent Musk from getting his big dumb mitts on other planets after he destroys the earth.</p></div></section><p><em>This article originally appeared in <a href="https://jacobin.com/2026/10/review-gibney-documentary-musk?utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Jacobin</a>, a democratic socialist magazine publishing long-form essays and analysis on politics, economics, and culture. <a href="https://jacobin.com/subscribe/?code=SYNDICATED&amp;utm_source=msn&amp;utm_medium=syndication&amp;utm_campaign=feed-footer">Subscribe to the print edition for $20 a year.</a></em></p></div></content><published>2026-10-20T17:20:20.947828Z</published><summary type="text">Alex Gibney’s Musk throws everything at the world’s first trillionaire, from an AI avatar in a gaming chair to first-person-shooter animation. The result is a four-hour slog that exhausts even Musk haters — and preaches a defeatism that serves the Right.</summary></entry></feed>